En_01
SB5A01(11)
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
Printed in Thailand
6MB27011-01
En
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
En
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or
tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere.
Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store
and Google Play.
Q1230UM_NT(En)01_cover.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 7, 2015 3:18 PM
D7200
Model Name: N1406
To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all
instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read
by all who use the product.
The Menu Guide
For more information on menu options and subjects such as how to
connect the camera to a printer or television, download the camera
Menu Guide from the Nikon website as described below.
The Menu Guide
is in pdf format and can be viewed using Adobe Reader or Adobe
Acrobat Reader.
1 On your computer, launch a web browser and open the Nikon manual
download site at http://nikonimglib.com/manual/
2 Navigate to the page for the desired product and download the
manual.
AFor Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” (0 x–xiii).
i
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
D
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read
before use to prevent damage to the camera.
A
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.
0
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
ii
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Memory cards are sold separately.
Cameras purchased in Japan display
menus and messages in English and Japanese only; other languages are
not supported.
We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause.
Package Contents
DK-23 rubber eyecup
(0 70)
BF-1B body cap
(0 23, 319)
D7200 camera (0 1)
EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover (0 21, 22)
MH-25a battery charger (comes with either an AC wall adapter or power
cable of a type and shape that varies with the country or region of sale;
0 21)
DK-5 eyepiece cap (0 70)
UC-E17 USB cable
AN-DC1 BK strap (0 20)
Warranty
User’s Manual (this guide)
A ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D Software
Use ViewNX-i to copy photos and movies to a computer for viewing.
ViewNX-i is available for download from the following website:
http://nikonimglib.com/nvnxi/
Use Capture NX-D to fine-tune pictures that have been copied to a
computer and to convert NEF (RAW) images to other formats.
Capture NX-D is available for download from:
http://nikonimglib.com/ncnxd/
For the latest information on Nikon software, including system
requirements, visit the websites listed on page xix.
iii
Package Contents ........................................................................ ii
For Your Safety ............................................................................. x
Notices......................................................................................... xiv
Wireless ........................................................................................ xx
Introduction 1
Getting to Know the Camera ..................................................... 1
The Multi Selector ...................................................................... 15
Camera Menus ............................................................................ 16
Using Camera Menus ........................................................................ 17
First Steps .................................................................................... 20
Basic Photography and Playback 30
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j Modes) ........... 30
Basic Playback............................................................................. 39
Deleting Unwanted Photographs ................................................ 40
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation
(Scene Mode) 41
Special Effects 44
Options Available in Live View ...................................................... 46
P, S, A, and M Modes 51
P: Programmed Auto ......................................................................... 52
S: Shutter-Priority Auto ..................................................................... 53
A: Aperture-Priority Auto.................................................................. 54
M: Manual............................................................................................... 56
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ................................ 58
Table of Contents
iv
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes 62
Saving User Settings .......................................................................... 62
Recalling User Settings...................................................................... 64
Resetting User Settings..................................................................... 65
Release Mode 66
Choosing a Release Mode......................................................... 66
Frame Advance Rate .......................................................................... 67
Self-Timer Mode (E) .................................................................. 69
Mirror up Mode (M
UP).................................................................. 71
Image Recording Options 73
Image Area................................................................................... 73
Image Quality and Size.............................................................. 77
Image Quality ....................................................................................... 77
Image Size.............................................................................................. 81
Using Two Memory Cards ......................................................... 82
Focus 83
Autofocus..................................................................................... 83
Autofocus Mode .................................................................................. 83
AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 86
Focus Lock ............................................................................................. 93
Manual Focus .............................................................................. 97
ISO Sensitivity 99
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.................................................. 102
v
Exposure 105
Metering .................................................................................... 105
Autoexposure Lock.................................................................. 107
Exposure Compensation ........................................................ 109
White Balance 111
Fine-Tuning White Balance .................................................... 114
Choosing a Color Temperature ............................................. 117
Preset Manual ........................................................................... 120
Viewfinder Photography................................................................ 120
Live View (Spot White Balance) ................................................... 124
Managing Presets............................................................................. 127
Image Enhancement 130
Picture Controls........................................................................ 130
Selecting a Picture Control............................................................ 130
Modifying Picture Controls ........................................................... 132
Creating Custom Picture Controls.............................................. 135
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows .................... 139
Active D-Lighting.............................................................................. 139
High Dynamic Range (HDR).......................................................... 141
Flash Photography 144
Using the Built-in Flash ........................................................... 144
Auto Pop-up Modes......................................................................... 144
Manual Pop-up Modes ................................................................... 146
Flash Compensation................................................................ 151
FV Lock ....................................................................................... 153
vi
Remote Control Photography 156
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control.......................... 156
Wireless Remote Controllers ................................................. 160
WR-1 Wireless Remote Controllers ............................................ 160
WR-R10/WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers...................... 160
Recording and Viewing Movies 161
Recording Movies.................................................................... 161
The Live View Display: Movies..................................................... 165
Maximum Length............................................................................. 166
Indices .................................................................................................. 167
Image Area.......................................................................................... 168
Taking Photos in Movie Mode..................................................... 169
Time-Lapse Photography ...................................................... 171
Viewing Movies........................................................................ 177
Editing Movies ......................................................................... 179
Trimming Movies ............................................................................. 179
Saving Selected Frames................................................................. 183
Other Shooting Options 185
The R Button (Viewfinder Photography)........................... 185
The i Button............................................................................. 189
The i-Button Menu (Viewfinder Photography) .................... 190
The i-Button Menu (Live View) .................................................. 191
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .................. 194
Bracketing................................................................................. 197
Multiple Exposure ................................................................... 211
Interval Timer Photography .................................................. 217
Non-CPU Lenses....................................................................... 224
Location Data ........................................................................... 227
vii
More on Playback 229
Viewing Pictures....................................................................... 229
Full-Frame Playback......................................................................... 229
Thumbnail Playback ........................................................................ 231
Calendar Playback ............................................................................ 232
The i Button....................................................................................... 233
Photo Information ................................................................... 234
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 243
Protecting Photographs from Deletion............................... 245
Deleting Photographs............................................................. 246
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback.................... 246
The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 248
Wi-Fi 250
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You ..................................................... 250
Accessing the Camera ............................................................. 251
Android and iOS: Connecting via SSID ..................................... 251
Android: Connecting via NFC....................................................... 254
Android: Other Wi-Fi Connection Options.............................. 256
Restoring Default Settings ............................................................ 256
Wireless Security ............................................................................... 257
Selecting Pictures for Upload ................................................ 263
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload.................................. 263
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload..................................... 264
Selecting Pictures for Upload via NFC....................................... 264
Downloading Selected Pictures to the Smart Device ....... 265
viii
Menu List 266
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images................................ 266
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Photo Shooting Options............ 268
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options ............ 273
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ....................... 276
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup.............................................. 289
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies...................... 294
O My Menu/m Recent Settings ............................................ 297
Retouch Menu Options .......................................................... 298
Trim ....................................................................................................... 298
Image Overlay ................................................................................... 299
NEF (RAW) Processing .................................................................... 302
Technical Notes 304
Compatible Lenses.................................................................. 304
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ...................................... 311
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS).............................. 311
Other Accessories.................................................................... 319
Caring for the Camera ............................................................ 320
Storage................................................................................................. 320
Cleaning............................................................................................... 320
Image Sensor Cleaning .................................................................. 321
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .................... 328
ix
Troubleshooting....................................................................... 333
Battery/Display .................................................................................. 333
Shooting (All Modes)....................................................................... 334
Shooting (P, S, A, M) ........................................................................... 337
Playback ............................................................................................... 338
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) .............................................................. 340
Miscellaneous .................................................................................... 340
Error Messages.......................................................................... 341
Specifications............................................................................ 348
Lenses......................................................................................... 363
Approved Memory Cards ....................................................... 379
Memory Card Capacity............................................................ 380
Battery Life ................................................................................ 382
Index ........................................................................................... 384
x
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this
equipment.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the
product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
❚❚ WARNINGS
AKeep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
ADo not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
AUsing the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with your
eye to the viewfinder, care should be
taken not to put your finger in your
eye accidentally.
ATurn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter (available
separately), unplug the AC adapter
and remove the battery immediately,
taking care to avoid burns.
Continued operation could result in
injury.
After removing the battery,
take the equipment to a Nikon-
authorized service center for
inspection.
ADo not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment in
the presence of flammable gas, as
this could result in explosion or fire.
AKeep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury. In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
choking hazard. Should a child
swallow any part of this equipment,
consult a physician immediately.
For Your Safety
This icon marks warnings.
To prevent possible injury, read all
warnings before using this Nikon product.
A
xi
A
Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury.
In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified
technician.
Should the product break
open as the result of a fall or other
accident, remove the battery and/or
AC adapter and then take the product
to a Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
ADo not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the
neck of an infant or child could result
in strangulation.
ADo not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct contact
with the skin for extended periods
may result in low-temperature burns.
ADo not leave the product where it will be
exposed to extremely high
temperatures, such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight
Failure to observe this precaution
could cause damage or fire.
ADo not aim a flash at the operator of a
motor vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in accidents.
AObserve caution when using the flash
• Using the camera with the flash in
close contact with the skin or other
objects could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment.
The flash should be no
less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from
the subject. Particular care should
be observed when photographing
infants.
AAvoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care
should be taken to avoid injury due to
broken glass and to prevent the liquid
crystal from the monitor touching the
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.
ADo not carry tripods with a lens or camera
attached
You could trip or accidentally strike
others, resulting in injury.
xii
A
Observe proper precautions when
handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled.
Observe the
following precautions when handling
batteries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use
in this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery.
If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to flame
or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged.
To avoid damage
to the product, be sure to remove
the battery when no charge
remains.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and store
in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the battery
to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration or
deformation.
AObserve proper precautions when
handling the charger
• Keep dry.
Failure to observe this
precaution could result in injury or
product malfunction due to fire or
electric shock.
• Do not short the charger terminals.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and
damage to the charger.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth.
Continued use could
result in fire.
xiii
• Do not handle the power cable or
go near the charger during
thunderstorms.
Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
• Do not damage, modify, or forcibly
tug or bend the power cable.
Do
not place it under heavy objects or
expose it to heat or flame.
Should
the insulation be damaged and the
wires become exposed, take the
power cable to a Nikon-authorized
service representative for
inspection.
Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or
electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands.
Failure to observe
this precaution could result in injury
or product malfunction due to fire
or electric shock.
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from
one voltage to another or with DC-
to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe
this precaution could damage the
product or cause overheating or fire.
AUse appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input
and output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
AFollow the instructions of airline and
hospital personnel
xiv
•
No part of the manuals included with
this product may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into
any language in any form, by any
means, without Nikon’s prior written
permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change
the specifications of the hardware
and software described in these
manuals at any time and without
prior notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of
this product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete,
we would appreciate it were you to
bring any errors or omissions to the
attention of the Nikon
representative in your area (address
provided separately).
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
This symbol indicates
that electrical and
electronic equipment is
to be collected
separately.
The following apply only
to users in European countries:
• This product is designated for
separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• Separate collection and recycling
helps conserve natural resources
and prevent negative consequences
for human health and the
environment that might result from
incorrect disposal.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the
battery indicates that the
battery is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only
to users in European
countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point.
Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
xv
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Power Cable
At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the
voltage in use, be at least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or
better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful
interference in a residential
installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio
communications.
However, there is
no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If
this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/television
technician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not
expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your
equipment.
Using other interface
cables may exceed the limits of
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of
California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this
product may expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of
California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Wash hands
after handling.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
D7200
xvi
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied
or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of
paper money, coins, or securities
which are circulated in a foreign
country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
postage stamps or post cards issued
by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of
stamps issued by the government
and of certified documents
stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and
reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or
coupon tickets, except when a
minimum of necessary copies are to
be provided for business use by a
company.
Also, do not copy or
reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by public
agencies and private groups, ID cards,
and tickets, such as passes and meal
coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
photographs is governed by national
and international copyright laws.
Do
not use this product for the purpose
of making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
xvii
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data.
Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky).
Be sure to also replace any
pictures selected for preset manual (0 127).
Before discarding the camera or
transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Wi-Fi >
Network settings > Reset network settings (0 256) and Network >
Network settings options in the camera setup menu to delete any personal
network information.
For more information on the Network menu, see the
documentation provided with the optional communication unit.
Care should
be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
xviii
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE http://www.mpegla.com
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty.
The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
xix
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use
with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate
within its operational and safety requirements.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally.
Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography.
Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area.
See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xx
This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United
States, is controlled by the United States Export Administration Regulations
and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United
States embargoes goods.
The following countries are currently subject to
embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria.
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions.
Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless
features of this product outside the country of purchase.
Notices for Customers in the U. S. A.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation
may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
Wireless
xxi
Notices for Customers in Canada
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices.
There is no proof, however,
that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe.
Low power
Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects.
Many
studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects.
Some
studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such
findings have not been confirmed by additional research.
The D7200, which
is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650 / IC ID: 772C-LBYR650)
wireless LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Please refer
to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
xxii
Notices for Customers in Europe
Hereby, Nikon Corporation, declares that the D7200 is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity
may be consulted at http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D7200.pdf
Notice for Customers in Singapore
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of
certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely
connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the
following may occur if security is not enabled:
• Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to
steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.
• Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network
and alter data or perform other malicious actions.
Note that due to the
design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized
access even when security is enabled.
Trade Name:
Model: D7200
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA103423
1
Introduction
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays.
You may find it helpful to bookmark this section
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
Getting to Know the Camera
1 Stereo microphone...163, 192, 273
2 Release mode dial ....................8, 66
3 Mode dial...........................................6
4 Mode dial lock release....................6
5 Eyelet for camera strap................ 20
6 Release mode dial lock
release ........................................ 8, 66
7 Accessory shoe (for optional flash
unit)......................................311, 319
8 Z/Q button..................... 106, 289
9 Movie-record button ................. 163
10 Power switch ............................. 5, 24
11 Shutter-release button..........34, 35
12 E button.............................. 109, 194
13 Focal plane mark (E) ................. 98
14 Control panel....................................9
2
The Camera Body (Continued)
1 Built-in flash...........................36, 144
2 Mirror.......................................71, 324
3 Meter coupling lever ................. 352
4 Lens mounting mark ....................23
5 M/Y button.............. 144, 146, 151
6 Infrared receiver (front)............. 157
7 D button................. 198, 203, 207
8 Cover for USB and external
microphone connectors
.............................................. 193, 319
9 HDMI connector cover .............. 319
10 Cover for accessory terminal and
headphone connector
..................................... 160, 193, 227
11 Lens release button ......................29
12 AF-mode button..................... 84, 90
13 Focus-mode selector............. 83, 97
14 Connector for external
microphone....................... 193, 319
15 USB connector
16 HDMI connector ......................... 319
17 Accessory terminal............ 160, 227
18 Headphone connector.............. 193
A Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
3
1 AF-assist illuminator ........... 34, 277
Self-timer lamp.............................. 69
Red-eye reduction lamp
..............................................145, 147
2 Sub-command dial.....................285
3 Pv button ............. 55, 167, 285, 288
4 Fn button....................... 76, 284, 288
5 N-Mark (NFC antenna)...............254
6 Battery-chamber cover .........22, 28
7 Battery-chamber cover
latch..........................................22, 28
8 Contact cover for optional MB-D15
battery pack................................ 319
9 Power connector cover
10 CPU contacts
11 Lens mount ..............................23, 98
12 AF coupling
13 Tripod socket
14 Body cap ............................ ii, 23, 319
4
The Camera Body (Continued)
1 Viewfinder eyepiece ..............10, 25
2 Rubber eyecup ...............................70
3 Diopter adjustment control ........25
4 A button ..............94, 107, 285, 288
5 O/Q button.................40, 246, 289
6 K button ...............................39, 229
7 Monitor ..........31, 39, 161, 185, 229
8 G button............................16, 266
9 L/U button
.............17, 112, 115, 119, 121, 245
10 X/T button ...... 38, 78, 81, 243
11 W/S button
................... 100, 104, 194, 231, 232
12 i button............................... 189, 233
13 R (info) button ....................13, 185
14 Main command dial................... 285
15 Multi selector...........................15, 17
16 J (OK) button ............... 15, 17, 284
17 Focus selector lock........................89
18 Memory card slot cover........ 22, 28
19 Memory card access lamp
.................................................35, 220
20 a button ........................ 12, 31, 161
21 Infrared receiver (rear) .............. 157
22 Live view selector.......... 12, 31, 161
23 Speaker ..................................... 5, 178
5
A LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch toward
D
activates the standby
timer and control panel backlight (LCD illuminator),
allowing the display to be read in the dark.
After the
power switch is released, the illuminators will remain lit for
a few seconds while the standby timer is active or until the
shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward
D
again.
D The Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on
the magnetic devices.
Power
switch
6
The Mode Dial
The camera offers the modes listed below.
To choose a mode,
press the mode dial lock release and rotate the mode dial.
e, f, g, and h modes:
• e—Programmed auto (0 52)
• f—Shutter-priority auto (0 53)
• g—Aperture-priority auto (0 54)
• h—Manual (0 56)
Auto modes:
• i Auto (0 30)
• j Auto (flash off) (0 30)
Scene modes (0 41)
j and k modes (0 62)
Special effects modes (0 44)
Mode dial
Mode dial lock release
8
The Release-Mode Dial
To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial lock
release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting
(0 66).
Release mode dial lock release
Release mode dial
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 S Single frame................................66
2 T Continuous low speed ...........66
3 U Continuous high speed .........66
4 J Quiet shutter-release...............66
5 E Self-timer............................. 66, 69
6 V Mirror up.......................... 66, 71
9
The Control Panel
The control panel shows a variety of camera settings when the
camera is on.
The items shown here appear the first time the
camera is turned on; information on other settings can be found
in the relevant sections of this manual.
123
4
5
8
9
76
1 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56
2 Battery indicator ........................... 26
3 Aperture (f-number) ..............54, 56
4 Memory card indicator
(Slot 1) ......................................27, 82
5 Memory card indicator
(Slot 2) ......................................27, 82
6 Number of exposures
remaining...................................... 27
7 ISO sensitivity ................................ 99
8 Metering ....................................... 105
9 ISO sensitivity indicator .............. 99
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator ...................................... 103
A Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the memory card
icon and number of exposures remaining
will be displayed (some memory cards may
in rare cases only display this information
when the camera is on).
Control panel
10
The Viewfinder
675
9
3
1
2
4
11 12 1815 1916 1714 22
24
23
25 27 2826
30
8
10
13 2120
29
1 Special effects mode
indicator .........................................44
2 Monochrome indicator .......44, 130
3 AF area brackets......................25, 33
4 “No memory card” indicator.......29
5 1.3× DX crop............................73, 74
6 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting d7,
Viewfinder grid display)... 280
7 Focus points.................... 34, 89, 277
8 1.3× DX crop indicator.......... 73, 74
9 Roll indicator (portrait
orientation)
*
10 Roll indicator (landscape
orientation)
*
11 Focus indicator................. 34, 93, 98
12 Autoexposure (AE) lock............. 107
13 Flexible program indicator..........52
11
* When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn
button, 0 284) or f3 (Assign preview button, 0 285) > Press, the selected
button can be used to display a roll indicator in the viewfinder.
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
14 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56
15 Aperture (f-number) ..............54, 56
Aperture (number of
stops)..................................... 54, 308
16 HDR indicator............................... 142
17 ADL indicator ...............................140
18 Exposure/flash bracketing
indicator.......................................198
WB bracketing indicator ...........203
ADL bracketing indicator..........207
19 Low battery warning ................... 26
20 ISO sensitivity indicator............. 100
21 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 27
22 Flash-ready indicator .......... 36, 280
23 FV lock indicator..........................154
24 Flash sync indicator.................... 282
25 Aperture stop indicator...... 54, 308
26 Exposure indicator ....................... 57
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 109
27 Flash compensation
indicator ..................................... 151
28 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 110
29 Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator ...................................... 103
30 Number of exposures
remaining...................................... 27
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ............ 68, 380
Preset manual white balance
recording indicator ................... 122
D No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim.
This is normal and does not indicate
a malfunction.
The viewfinder display will return to normal when a
fully-charged battery is inserted.
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures.
This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
12
The Monitor (Live View)
To frame photos or movies in the
monitor, rotate the live view selector to
C (photo live view) or 1 (movie live
view) and press the a button.
Live view selector rotated to C Live view selector rotated to 1
D The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends
automatically (the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect
the internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for
Custom Setting c4—Monitor off delay > Live view; 0 279—5 s
before the monitor is due to turn off automatically).
Depending on
shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live
view is selected.
Movie recording will end automatically when the
timer expires, regardless of the amount of recording time available.
a button
13
❚❚ Viewing and Hiding Indicators
Press the R button to hide or display
indicators in the monitor.
C Mode
If the live view selector is rotated to C (photo live view),
pressing the R button cycles through the following displays.
Virtual horizon Information on
Framing guides Information off
R button
14
1 Mode
If the live view selector is rotated to 1 (movie live view), pressing
the R button cycles through the following displays.
Virtual horizon Information on Information off
Histogram Framing guides
15
In this manual, operations using the multi selector are
represented by 1, 3, 4, and 2 icons.
The Multi Selector
1: Press the multi selector up
4: Press the multi
selector left
2: Press the multi
selector right
J button
3: Press the multi selector down
16
Most shooting, playback, and setup
options can be accessed from the camera
menus.
To view the menus, press the
G button.
Camera Menus
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 266)
• C: Photo Shooting (0 268)
• 1: Movie Shooting (0 273)
• A: Custom Settings (0 276)
• B: Setup (0 289)
• N: Retouch (0 294)
• O/m: MY MENU or RECENT SETTINGS
(defaults to MY MENU; 0 297)
Help icon (0 17)
G button
Slider shows position in current
menu.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
17
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the
camera menus.
A The d (Help) Icon
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, help
can be displayed by pressing the L (U) button.
A description of the currently selected option or menu will be
displayed while the button is pressed.
Press 1 or 3 to scroll through
the display.
L (U) button
2: Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
1: Move cursor up
3: Move cursor down
J button: select
highlighted item
4: Cancel and return to
previous menu
18
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1 Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
2 Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
3 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4 Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
G button
19
5 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6 Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu item.
7 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option.
8 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit
without making a selection, press the G button.
Note the following:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently
available.
• While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J,
there are some cases in which selection can only be made by
pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
20
Follow the seven steps below to ready the camera for use.
1 Attach the strap.
Attach the strap as shown.
Repeat for the second eyelet.
First Steps
21
2 Charge the battery.
Insert the battery and plug the charger in (depending on the
country or region, the charger comes with either an AC wall
adapter or a power cable).
An exhausted battery will fully
charge in about two hours and 35 minutes.
• AC wall adapter: Insert the AC wall adapter into the charger AC
inlet (q).
Slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown (w) and
rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in place (e).
Insert the
battery and plug the charger in.
• Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug
in the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the
cable in.
The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges.
AC wall adapter latch
Battery charging Charging complete
90 °
22
3 Insert the battery and memory card.
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that power switch is in the OFF position. Insert the
battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep
the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks
the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
If you are using only one memory card, insert it into slot 1
(0 27).
Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.
Battery latch
A The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xiii and 330–332
of this manual.
23
4 Attach a lens.
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when
the lens or body cap is removed. The lens generally used in
this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–
105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR.
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
Remove the
camera body cap
Remove the rear lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Mounting mark (lens)
Align the mounting
marks
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
24
5 Turn the camera on.
The control panel will light.
If this is the first time the
camera has been turned
on, a language-selection
dialog will be displayed.
6 Choose a language and
set the camera clock.
Use the multi selector and
J button to select a
language and set the
camera clock. When
setting the camera clock,
you will be prompted to
choose a time zone, date
format, and daylight saving time option before setting the
time and date; note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock.
Language and date/time settings can be changed at any time
using the Language (0 290) and Time zone and date
(0 290) options in the setup menu.
A Image Sensor Cleaning
The camera vibrates the image sensor to remove dust when the
camera is turned on or off (0 321).
Power switch
Control panel
Move cursor up
J button: select
highlighted item
Select highlighted
item or display sub-
menu
Move cursor down
25
7 Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter
adjustment control until
the AF area brackets are
in sharp focus. When
operating the control
with your eye to the
viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in
your eye.
The camera is now ready for use. Proceed to page 30 for
information on taking photographs.
Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus
AF area brackets
26
❚❚ Battery Level
The battery level is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
Control panel Viewfinder
Control panel Viewfinder Description
L
— Battery fully charged.
K
—
Battery partially discharged.
J
—
I
—
H d
Low battery.
Charge battery or ready spare
battery.
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
Shutter release disabled.
Charge or
exchange battery.
27
❚❚ Number of Exposures Remaining
The camera has two memory card slots:
slot 1 and slot 2. Slot 1 is for the main
card; the card in slot 2 plays a backup or
secondary role. If the default setting of
Overflow is selected for Role played by
card in Slot 2 (0 82) when two memory
cards are inserted, the card in slot 2 will
only be used when the card in slot 1 is
full.
The control panel shows the slot or slots
that currently hold a memory card (the
example at right shows the icons
displayed when a card is inserted in each
slot).
If the memory card is full or locked
or an error has occurred, the icon for the
affected card will flash (0 344).
The control panel and viewfinder show
the number of photographs that can be
taken at current settings (values over
1000 are rounded down to the nearest
hundred; e.g., values between 1800 and
1899 are shown as 1.8 k). If two memory
cards are inserted, the displays show the
space available on the card in Slot 1.
Slot 1
Slot 2
Control panel
Number of exposures
remaining
Control panel
Viewfinder
28
❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the
battery-chamber cover. Press the battery
latch in the direction shown by the arrow
to release the battery and then remove
the battery by hand.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card
access lamp is off, turn the camera off,
open the memory card slot cover, and
press the card in and then release it (q).
The card can then be removed by hand
(w).
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use.
Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards.
Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
16
GB
29
❚❚ Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing
or exchanging lenses.
To remove the
lens, press and hold the lens release
button (q) while turning the lens
clockwise (w).
After removing the lens,
replace the lens caps and camera body
cap.
A No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the control
panel and viewfinder will show S.
If
the camera is turned off with a charged
battery and no memory card inserted,
S will be displayed in the control
panel.
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped
with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data.
When this switch is in the “lock”
position, the memory card can not
be formatted and photos can not
be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the monitor if
you attempt to release the shutter).
To unlock the memory card, slide
the switch to the “write” position.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 307), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
Write-protect switch
16
GB
30
Basic Photography and Playback
This section describes how to take photographs
in i and j modes.
i and j are automatic
“point-and-shoot” modes in which the majority
of settings are controlled by the camera in
response to shooting conditions.
1 Turn the camera on.
The control panel will light.
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography (i and j
Modes)
Power switch
31
2 Pressing the mode dial
lock release on top of the
camera, rotate the mode
dial to i or j.
Photographs can be framed in the
viewfinder or in the monitor (live
view).
To start live view, rotate the live
view selector to C and press the a
button.
Framing pictures in the
viewfinder
Framing pictures in the
monitor (live view)
Mode dial
Mode dial lock release
Live view selector
a button
32
3 Ready the camera.
Viewfinder photography: When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle
the camera body or lens with your left.
Bring your elbows in
against the sides of your chest.
Live view: When framing photographs in the monitor, hold the
handgrip in your right hand and cradle the lens with your left.
A Framing Photographs in Portrait (Tall) Orientation
When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown below.
Framing photographs
in the viewfinder
Framing photographs
in the monitor
33
4 Frame the photograph.
Viewfinder photography: Frame a
photograph in the viewfinder with the
main subject in the AF area brackets.
Live view: At default settings, the
camera automatically detects faces
and selects the focus point.
If no face
is detected, use the multi selector to
position the focus point over the main
subject.
A Using a Zoom Lens
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject
so that it fills a larger area of the frame, or
zoom out to increase the area visible in the
final photograph (select longer focal lengths
on the lens focal length scale to zoom in,
shorter focal lengths to zoom out).
AF area brackets
Focus point
Zoom in Zoom out
Zoom ring
34
5 Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Viewfinder photography: Press the
shutter-release button halfway to
focus (the AF-assist illuminator may
light if the subject is poorly lit). When
the focus operation is complete, the
active focus point and in-focus
indicator (I) will appear in the
viewfinder.
Live view: The focus point flashes green
while the camera focuses. If the
camera is able to focus, the focus
point will be displayed in green;
otherwise, the focus point will flash
red.
In-focus
indicator
Description
I Subject in focus.
F Focus point is between camera and subject.
H Focus point is behind subject.
FH
Camera unable to focus using autofocus.
See page 96.
(flashes)
Focus point
Focus indicator
Focus point
35
6 Shoot.
Smoothly press the
shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to
take the photograph. The
memory card access lamp
will light and the
photograph will be
displayed in the monitor
for a few seconds.
Do not
eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source
until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
To end live view, press the a button.
Memory card access
lamp
a button
36
A The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct
exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will
pop up automatically when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
If the flash
is raised, photographs can only be taken
when the flash-ready indicator (M) is
displayed.
If the flash-ready indicator is not
displayed, the flash is charging; remove your finger briefly from the
shutter-release button and try again.
Viewfinder Live view
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
37
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder indicator display and control panel shutter
speed and aperture display will turn off if no operations
are performed for about six seconds, reducing the drain on
the battery.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
reactivate the display.
The length of time before the
standby timer expires automatically can be selected using Custom
Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279).
Exposure meters off Exposure meters on
A The Monitor off Delay (Live View)
The monitor will turn off if no operations are performed for about ten
minutes.
The length of time before the monitor turns off automatically
can be selected using Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 279) >
Live view.
D Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with
photographs and exposure, the rubber eyecup can be removed and
the viewfinder covered with the supplied eyepiece cap before
shooting (0 70).
38
A Live View Zoom Preview
Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the selected focus point to a
maximum magnification of about 19 ×.
A navigation window will
appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display.
Use
the multi selector to reposition the focus point or press W (S) to
zoom out.
X (T) button Navigation window
A Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would
be obtained when live view is not used.
D Shooting in Live View
Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while
bright regions or bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs
and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
In
addition, distortion may occur with moving subjects, particularly if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high
speed through the frame.
Flicker and banding visible in the monitor
under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced
using Flicker reduction (0 290), although they may still be visible in
the final photograph at some shutter speeds.
Avoid pointing the
camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
39
1 Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the
monitor. The memory card
containing the picture currently
displayed is shown by an icon.
2 View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or
2.
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
Basic Playback
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 267),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for a few
seconds after shooting.
A See Also
See page 233 for information on choosing a memory card slot.
K button
40
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor,
press the O (Q) button.
Note that photographs can not be
recovered once deleted.
1 Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described on the preceding
page.
2 Delete the photograph.
Press the O (Q) button.
A
confirmation dialog will be displayed;
press the O (Q) button again to
delete the image and return to
playback.
To exit without deleting the
picture, press K.
A Delete
To delete selected images (0 248), all images taken on a selected date
(0 249), or all images in a chosen location on a selected memory card
(0 248), use the Delete option in the playback menu.
K button
O (Q) button
41
Matching Settings to the Subject or
Situation (Scene Mode)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes.
Choosing a scene
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a
mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on pages
30–35.
To view the currently selected scene, rotate the mode dial to
SCENE and press the R button.
To choose another scene, rotate
the main command dial.
Note that the scene can not be changed during live view while
the live view selector is in the 1 position.
Mode dial Main command
dial
Monitor
42
❚❚ Scenes
Option Description
k
Portrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking skin
tones.
If the subject is far from the background or a
telephoto lens is used, background details will be
softened to lend the composition a sense of depth.
l
Landscape Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.
1, 2
p
Child
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing and
background details are vividly rendered, while skin
tones remain soft and natural.
m
Sports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic
sports shots in which the main subject stands out
clearly.
1, 2
n
Close Up
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects, and other
small objects (a macro lens can be used to focus at
very close ranges).
o
Night Portrait
Use for a natural balance between the main subject
and the background in portraits taken under low
light.
r
Night Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors when
photographing night landscapes, including street
lighting and neon signs.
1, 2
s
Party/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor background lighting.
Use for parties and other indoor scenes.
t
Beach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlight expanses of
water, snow, or sand.
1, 2
43
1 The built-in flash turns off.
2 The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
u
Sunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and
sunrises.
1, 2
v
Dusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light
before dawn or after sunset.
1, 2
w
Pet Portrait Use for portraits of active pets.
2
x
Candlelight For photographs taken by candlelight.
1
y
Blossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in bloom, and
other landscapes featuring expanses of blossoms.
1
z
Autumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in autumn
leaves.
1
0
Food
Use for vivid photographs of food.
For flash
photography, press the M (Y) button to raise the
flash (0 146).
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
Option Description
44
Special Effects
Special effects can be used when taking photographs and
shooting movies.
To view the currently selected effect, rotate the mode dial to
EFFECTS and press the R button.
To choose another effect, rotate
the main command dial.
Note that the effect can not be changed during live view while
the live view selector is in the 1 position.
❚❚ Special Effects
Mode dial Main command
dial
Monitor
Option Description
%
Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to record
monochrome images at high ISO sensitivities
(manual focus is available if the camera is unable to
focus).
1
g
Color Sketch
The camera detects and colors outlines for a color
sketch effect. The effect can be adjusted in live view
(0 46).
Note that movies recorded in this mode
play back like a slide show made up of a series of
stills.
45
1 The built-in flash turns off.
2 The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
i
Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be pictures of
dioramas. Works best when shooting from a high
vantage point. Miniature effect movies play back at
high speed, compressing about 45 minutes of
footage shot at 1920 × 1080/30p into a silent movie
that plays back in about three minutes. The effect
can be adjusted in live view (0 47).
1, 2
u
Selective Color
All colors other than the selected colors are
recorded in black and white. The effect can be
adjusted in live view (0 49).
1
1
Silhouette Silhouette subjects against bright backgrounds.
1
2
High Key
Use when shooting bright scenes to create bright
images that seem filled with light.
1
3
Low Key
Use when shooting dark scenes to create dark, low-
key images with prominent highlights.
1
A Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
A NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, g, i, and u modes.
Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is
selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images. JPEG images
created at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG will be recorded at the
selected JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW)
will be recorded as fine-quality images.
A g and i Modes
Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view
refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous
release mode; using autofocus during live view will disrupt the
preview.
Option Description
46
Options Available in Live View
Settings for the selected effect are adjusted in the live view
display but apply during live view and viewfinder photography
and movie recording.
❚❚ g Color Sketch
1 Select live view.
Press the a button. The view through
the lens will be displayed in the
monitor.
2 Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown
at right. Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or
2 to change. Vividness can be
increased to make colors more
saturated, or decreased for a washed-
out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made
thicker or thinner. Increasing the thickness of the lines also
makes colors more saturated.
3 Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are
complete. To resume viewfinder
photography, press the a button.
a button
47
❚❚ i Miniature Effect
1 Select live view.
Press the a button. The view through
the lens will be displayed in the
monitor.
2 Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the
focus point in the area that will be in
focus and then press the shutter-
release button halfway to check focus.
To temporarily clear miniature effect
options from the display and enlarge
the view in the monitor for precise focus, press X (T).
Press W (S) to restore the miniature effect display.
3 Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect
options.
a button
48
4 Adjust options.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be in
focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its
width.
5 Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are
complete.
To resume viewfinder
photography, press the a button.
49
❚❚ u Selective Color
1 Select live view.
Press the a button. The view through
the lens will be displayed in the
monitor.
2 Display options.
Press J to display selective color
options.
3 Select a color.
Frame an object in the white square in
the center of the display and press 1
to choose the color of the object as
one that will remain in the final image
(the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color). To zoom in on the
center of the display for more precise color selection, press X
(T). Press W (S) to zoom out.
a button
Selected color
50
4 Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final image. Choose
from values between 1 and 7; note
that higher values may include
hues from other colors.
5 Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the main command
dial to highlight another of
the three color boxes at the
top of the display and
repeat Steps 3 and 4 to
select another color.
Repeat for a third color if desired. To
deselect the highlighted color, press O (Q).
To remove all
colors, press and hold O (Q). A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; select Ye s .
6 Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are
complete.
During shooting, only
objects of the selected hues will be
recorded in color; all others will be
recorded in black-and-white. To
resume viewfinder photography, press the a button.
Color range
51
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of
control over shutter speed and aperture.
Mode Description
P
Programmed auto (0 52): Camera sets shutter speed and
aperture for optimal exposure.
Recommended for snapshots
and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust
camera settings.
S
Shutter-priority auto (0 53): User chooses shutter speed; camera
selects aperture for best results.
Use to freeze or blur motion.
A
Aperture-priority auto (0 54): User chooses aperture; camera
selects shutter speed for best results.
Use to blur background
or bring both foreground and background into focus.
M
Manual (0 56): User controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Set shutter speed to Bulb (A) or Time (%) for long time-
exposures.
A Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 307), lock
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).
Type G
and E lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in modes A (aperture-priority auto)
and M (manual), when aperture can only be adjusted using the lens
aperture ring.
Selecting any other mode disables the shutter release.
For more information, see “Compatible Lenses” (0 304).
52
P: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed
and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations.
A Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected
by rotating the main command dial while
the exposure meters are on (“flexible
program”).
Rotate the dial to the right for
large apertures (low f-numbers) that blur
background details or fast shutter speeds
that “freeze” motion.
Rotate the dial to the
left for small apertures (high f-numbers)
that increase depth of field or slow shutter
speeds that blur motion.
All combinations
produce the same exposure.
While flexible
program is in effect, a flexible program
indicator (O or E) is displayed.
To restore
default shutter speed and aperture
settings, rotate the main command dial
until the indicator is no longer displayed,
choose another mode, or turn the camera
off.
Main command dial
Viewfinder
Monitor
53
S: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure.
To choose a shutter speed, rotate the
main command dial while the exposure
meters are on.
Shutter speed can be set
to “v” or to values between 30 s and
1
/
8000 s.
Control panel Monitor
A See Also
See page 343 for information on what to do if flashing “A” or “%”
indicator appears in the shutter-speed displays.
Main command dial
54
A: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the
camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce
the optimal exposure.
To choose an aperture between the
minimum and maximum values for the
lens, rotate the sub-command dial while
the exposure meters are on.
Control panel Monitor
A Non-CPU Lenses (0 308)
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust
aperture.
If the maximum aperture of the
lens has been specified using the Non-CPU
lens data item in setup menu (0 224)
when a non-CPU lens is attached, the
current f-number will be displayed,
rounded to the nearest full stop.
Otherwise the aperture displays will
show only the number of stops (F, with maximum aperture displayed
as FA) and the f-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.
Sub-command dial
55
A Depth-of-Field Preview (Viewfinder Photography)
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the Pv button.
The lens will be stopped
down to the aperture value selected by the
camera (modes P and S) or the value chosen
by the user (modes A and M), allowing depth
of field to be previewed in the viewfinder.
A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash (Viewfinder Photography; 0 284)
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and optional flash units
that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; 0 311) will emit
a modeling flash when the Pv button is pressed.
Pv button
56
M: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main
command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command
dial to set aperture.
Shutter speed can be set to “v” or to
values between 30 s and
1
/
8000 s, or the shutter can be held open
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A or %, 0 58).
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens.
Use the exposure indicators to
check exposure.
Sub-command dial
Aperture
Shutter speed
Main command dial
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio
need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to
set aperture.
57
A The Exposure Indicators
If a shutter speed other than “bulb” or “time” is selected, the exposure
indicators show whether the photograph would be under- or over-
exposed at current settings.
Depending on the option chosen for
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 278), the amount
of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of
1
/
3 EV or
1
/
2 EV. If
the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the exposure
indicators and the shutter speed (modes P and A) and/or aperture
(modes P and S) displays will flash.
Custom Setting b2 set to
1
/
3 step
Optimal exposure
Underexposed by
1
/
3 EV
Overexposed by
2EV
Control panel
Viewfinder
(viewfinder
photography)
Monitor
(live view)
A See Also
For information on reversing the exposure indicators so that negative
values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see
Custom Setting f8 (Reverse indicators, 0 286).
58
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter speeds for
long time-exposures of moving lights,
the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb (A): The shutter remains open
while the shutter-release button is held
down.
To prevent blur, use a tripod or
an optional wireless remote controller
(0 160, 319) or remote cord (0 319).
• Time (%): Start the exposure using the
shutter-release button on the camera or on an optional remote
control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller.
The shutter
remains open until the button is pressed a second time.
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on
a stable, level surface.
To prevent light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with
exposure, remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder
with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 70).
Note that noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in
long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by
choosing On for Long exposure NR in the photo shooting
menu (0 271).
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
59
❚❚ Bulb
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.
2 Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command
dial to choose a shutter speed of “Bulb” (A).
3 Take the photograph.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or on the optional wireless remote controller or
remote cord all the way down.
Remove your finger from the
shutter-release button when the exposure is complete.
Main command
dial
Control panel Monitor
Mode dial
60
❚❚ Time
1 Rotate the mode dial to M.
2 Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command
dial left to choose a shutter speed of “Time” (%).
3 Open the shutter.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless
remote controller all the way down.
4 Close the shutter.
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3.
Main command
dial
Control panel Monitor
Mode dial
61
A ML-L3 Remote Controls
If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select a remote control
mode (Delayed remote, Quick-response remote, or Remote mirror-
up) using the Remote control mode (ML-L3) option in the photo
shooting menu (0 156). Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote
control, pictures will be taken in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A
is selected for shutter speed.
The exposure starts when the shutter-
release button on the remote control is pressed and ends after 30
minutes or when the button is pressed again.
62
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the
mode dial.
Saving User Settings
1 Select a mode.
Rotate the mode dial to the
desired mode.
2 Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to flexible program (mode P),
shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture (modes A and M),
exposure and flash compensation, flash mode, focus point,
metering, autofocus and AF-area modes, bracketing, and
settings in the shooting and Custom Settings menus.
A User Settings
The following can not be saved to U1 or U2.
Photo shooting menu:
• Reset photo shooting menu
• Storage folder
• Image area
• Manage Picture Control
• Remote control mode (ML-L3)
• Multiple exposure
• Interval timer shooting
Movie shooting menu:
• Reset movie shooting menu
• Image area
• Manage Picture Control
• Time-lapse photography
Mode dial
63
3 Select Save user settings.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
Highlight Save user settings
in the setup menu and press 2.
4 Select Save to U1 or Save to U2.
Highlight Save to U1 or Save to U2
and press 2.
5 Save user settings.
Highlight Save settings and press J
to assign the settings selected in
Steps 1 and 2 to the mode dial
position selected in Step 4.
G button
64
Recalling User Settings
Simply rotate the mode dial to
U1 to recall the settings
assigned to Save to U1, or to
U2 to recall the settings
assigned to Save to U2.
Mode dial
65
Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:
1 Select Reset user settings.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
Highlight Reset user
settings in the setup menu and press
2.
2 Select Reset U1 or Reset U2.
Highlight Reset U1 or Reset U2 and
press 2.
3 Reset user settings.
Highlight Reset and press J.
G button
66
Release Mode
To choose a release mode, press the
release mode dial lock release and turn
the release mode dial to the desired
setting.
Choosing a Release Mode
Mode Description
S
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-
release button is pressed.
CL
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom
Setting d2 (Continuous low-speed, 0 67, 280).
Note that only
one picture will be taken if the flash fires.
CH
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records photographs at frame rate given on page 67.
Use for active subjects.
Note that only one picture will be taken
if the flash fires.
Q
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that mirror does
not click back into place while shutter-release button is fully
pressed, allowing user to control timing of click made by mirror,
which is also quieter than in single frame mode.
In addition,
beep does not sound regardless of setting selected for Custom
Setting d1 (Beep; 0 280).
E
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 69).
MUP
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in
telephoto or close-up photography or in other situations in
which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred
photographs (0 71).
67
Frame Advance Rate
The frame rate for continuous shooting (low and high speed)
varies with the option chosen for image area (0 73) and, when
an NEF (RAW) image quality option is selected, the NEF (RAW) bit
depth (0 80). The table below gives the approximate frame
rates for a fully-charged EN-EL15 battery, continuous-servo AF,
manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of
1
/
250 s or faster, and the remaining settings at default values.
Frame rates may drop at extremely small apertures (high f-
numbers) or slow shutter speeds, when vibration reduction
(available with VR lenses) or auto ISO sensitivity control (0 102)
is on, or when the battery is low, a non-CPU lens is attached, or
Aperture ring is selected for Custom Setting f5 (Customize
command dials) > Aperture setting (0 285).
The maximum
frame rate in live view is 3.7 fps.
Image area Image quality
Approximate frame advance rate
CL CH
DX (24×16)
JPEG/12-bit NEF (RAW) 1–6 fps 6 fps
14-bit NEF (RAW) 1–5 fps 5 fps
1.3× (18×12)
JPEG/12-bit NEF (RAW)
1–6 fps
7fps
14-bit NEF (RAW) 6 fps
68
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card.
The frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (tAA).
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the buffer at
current settings is shown in the exposure-count displays while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
The illustrations below show the
display when space remains in the buffer for about 42 pictures.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light.
Depending on shooting
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a
few seconds to a few minutes.
Do not remove the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone
out.
If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the
power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been
recorded.
If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer,
the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the
memory card.
A Live View
If a continuous release mode is used during live view, photographs will
be displayed in place of the view through the lens while the shutter-
release button is pressed.
A See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.
continuous release, 0 280).
For information on the number of
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 380.
69
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-
portraits.
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a
stable, level surface.
2 Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to E.
3 Frame the photograph and focus.
The self-timer can not be used if the camera is
unable to focus using single-servo AF or in other
situations in which the shutter can not be
released.
4 Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The self-
timer lamp will start to
flash. Two seconds before the photograph is taken, the self-
timer lamp will stop flashing. The shutter will be released
about ten seconds after the timer starts.
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.
Self-Timer Mode (E)
Release mode dial
70
A Cover the Viewfinder
When taking photos without your eye to the viewfinder, remove the
rubber eyecup (q) and insert the supplied eyepiece cap as shown (w).
This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in
photographs or interfering with exposure.
Hold the camera firmly
when removing the rubber eyecup.
Rubber eyecup Eyepiece cap
D Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the
flash to be raised manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash
and wait for the flash-ready indicator (M) to be displayed (0 146).
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has
started.
Note that only one photograph will be taken when the flash
fires, regardless of the number of exposures selected for Custom
Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 279).
A See Also
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number
of shots taken, and the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3
(Self-timer; 0 279).
For information on controlling the beeps that
sound when the self-timer is used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep;
0 280).
71
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised.
To use mirror-up mode,
press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release
mode dial to MUP (mirror up).
After pressing the shutter-release button halfway to set focus
and exposure, press the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down.
The viewfinder or monitor will turn off; in viewfinder
photography, the mirror will be raised.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down again to take the picture.
When
shooting ends, either live view will resume or (in viewfinder
photography) the mirror will lower.
Mirror up Mode (MUP)
Release mode dial lock release
Release mode dial
D Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder
and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
A Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s with the mirror raised.
73
Image Recording Options
Choose an image area from DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12).
Image Area
Option Description
a
DX (24×16)
Pictures are recorded using a 23.5 × 15.6 mm image
area (DX format).
Z
1.3× (18×12)
Pictures are recorded using a 18.8 × 12.5 mm image
area, producing a telephoto effect without the need
to change lenses.
The camera can also record more
images per second during continuous shooting
(0 67).
Viewfinder display
Photo with DX image area
(24×16)
Photo with image area of
1.3× (18×12)
74
A Image Area
The selected option is shown in the display.
Information display Shooting display
A The Viewfinder Display
The viewfinder display for the 1.3× DX crop
is shown at right. A s icon is displayed in the
viewfinder when the 1.3× DX crop is
selected.
A See Also
See page 168 for information on the crops available when the live view
selector is rotated to 1.
See page 380 for information on the number
of pictures that can be stored at different image area settings.
1.3× DX crop
75
The image area can be selected using the Image area option in
the shooting menus or by pressing a control and rotating a
command dial.
❚❚ The Image Area Menu
1 Select Image area.
Highlight Image area in either of the
shooting menus and press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Choose an option and press J.
The
selected crop is displayed in the
viewfinder (0 74).
A Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area (0 81).
76
❚❚ Camera Controls
In viewfinder photography, the image area can also be selected
with the Fn button and command dials.
1 Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Select Choose image area as the “Press + command dials”
option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu.
Image area selection can be assigned to the Fn button
(Custom Setting f2, Assign Fn button, 0 284), the Pv button
(Custom Setting f3, Assign preview button, 0 285), or the
A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f4, Assign AE-L/
AF-L button, 0 285).
2 Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be
selected by pressing the
selected button and rotating
the main or sub-command
dial until the desired crop is
displayed in the viewfinder
(0 74).
The option currently selected for
image area can be viewed by
pressing the button to display the
image area in the control panel,
viewfinder, or information display.
Fn button Main command
dial
77
Together, image quality and size determine how much space
each photograph occupies on the memory card.
Larger, higher
quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require
more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
on the memory card (0 380).
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Image Quality and Size
Option File type Description
NEF (RAW) NEF
Raw data from the image sensor are saved
without additional processing.
Settings such
as white balance and contrast can be
adjusted after shooting.
JPEG fine
JPEG
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
*
JPEG normal
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
*
JPEG basic
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
*
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
NEF/
JPEG
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)
image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG normal
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)
image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)
image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
The compression ratio is an
approximation only; the actual ratio varies with ISO sensitivity and the scene recorded.
78
Image quality can be set by pressing the X (T) button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the information display.
X (T) button Main command
dial
Information display
A NEF (RAW) Images
The option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF
(RAW) images.
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using
Capture NX-D or other software or the NEF (RAW) processing option
in the retouch menu (0 295).
A NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG
image will be displayed.
If both copies are recorded to the same
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted.
If
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Role
played by card in Slot 2 > RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 option, deleting
the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image.
79
A + NEF (RAW)
If + NEF (RAW) is assigned to the Fn button using Custom Setting f2
(Assign Fn button, 0 284) > Press and a JPEG option is selected for
image quality, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next
photograph taken after the Fn button is pressed (the original image
quality setting will be restored when you remove your finger from the
shutter-release button).
To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy,
press the Fn button again.
A The Photo Shooting Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in
the photo shooting menu (0 268).
80
❚❚ JPEG Compression
To choose the type of compression for JPEG images, highlight
JPEG compression in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
❚❚ Type
To choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images,
highlight NEF (RAW) recording > Type in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
To choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images, highlight NEF
(RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) bit depth in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
Option Description
O
Size priority
Images are compressed to produce relatively
uniform file size.
P
Optimal quality
Optimal image quality.
File size varies with scene
recorded.
Option Description
N
Lossless
compressed
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
with no effect on image quality.
O
Compressed
NEF images are compressed using a non-
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
Option Description
q
12-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of
12 bits.
r
14-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a
bit depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data
recorded.
81
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels.
Choose from # Large,
$ Medium, or % Small (note that image size varies depending
on the option selected for Image area, 0 73):
Image size can be set by pressing the X (T) button and
rotating the sub-command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the information display.
Image area Option Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.)
*
DX (24×16)
Large 6000 × 4000 50.8 × 33.9/20.0 × 13.3
Medium 4496 × 3000 38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10.0
Small 2992 × 2000 25.3 × 16.9/10.0 × 6.7
1.3× (18×12)
Large 4800 × 3200 40.6 × 27.1/16.0 × 10.7
Medium 3600 × 2400 30.5 × 20.3/12.0 × 8.0
Small 2400 × 1600 20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi.
Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
X (T) button Sub-command
dial
Information display
A The Photo Shooting Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the
photo shooting menu (0 269).
82
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can use
the Role played by card in Slot 2 item in the photo shooting
menu to choose the role played by the card in Slot 2.
Choose
from Overflow (the card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in
Slot 1 is full), Backup (each picture is recorded twice, once to the
card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2), and RAW Slot 1 -
JPEG Slot 2 (as for Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of
photos recorded at settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded
only to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copies only to the card in
Slot 2).
Using Two Memory Cards
A “Backup” and “RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2”
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card
with the least amount of memory.
Shutter release will be disabled
when either card is full.
A Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to
record movies can be selected using the Destination option in the
movie shooting menu (0 273).
83
Focus
Focus can be adjusted automatically (see below) or manually
(0 97).
The user can also select the focus point for automatic or
manual focus (0 89) or use focus lock to focus to recompose
photographs after focusing (0 93).
To use autofocus, rotate the
focus-mode selector to AF.
Autofocus Mode
The following autofocus modes can be selected during
viewfinder photography:
Autofocus
Mode Description
AF-A
Auto-servo AF: Camera automatically selects single-servo
autofocus if subject is stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if
subject is moving.
AF-S
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
At default settings, shutter
can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed
(focus priority; 0 276).
AF-C
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking
(0 85) to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as
necessary.
At default settings, shutter can be released whether
or not subject is in focus (release priority; 0 276).
Focus-mode selector
84
The following autofocus modes can be selected during live view:
Autofocus mode can be
selected by pressing the AF-
mode button and rotating the
main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed.
Mode Description
AF-S
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when shutter-
release button is pressed halfway.
AF-F
Full-time servo AF: For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously until shutter-release button is pressed.
Focus locks
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Control panel
Viewfinder Monitor
AF-mode button Main command
dial
85
A Predictive Focus Tracking (Viewfinder Photography)
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A
mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject
moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
This allows the camera to track focus while
attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is
released.
A See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 276).
For information
on using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2
(AF-S priority selection, 0 276).
See Custom Setting f5 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 285) for information on
using the sub-command dial to choose the focus mode.
86
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode controls how the camera selects the focus-point
for autofocus.
The following options are available during
viewfinder photography:
• Single-point AF: Select the focus point as described on page 89;
the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point
only.
Use with stationary subjects.
• Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point as described on page 89.
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, the camera will focus based on
information from surrounding focus points if the subject
briefly leaves the selected point.
The number of focus points
varies with the mode selected:
- 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
- 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football
game).
- 51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the
viewfinder (e.g., birds).
87
• 3D-tracking: Select the focus point as described on page 89.
In
AF-A and AF-C focus modes, the camera will track subjects that
leave the selected focus point and select new focus points as
required.
Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players).
If
the subject leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the
shutter-release button and recompose the photograph with
the subject in the selected focus point.
• Auto-area AF: The camera automatically
detects the subject and selects the
focus point (in the case of portrait
subjects, the camera is able to
distinguish the subject from the
background for improved subject
detection).
The active focus points are
highlighted briefly after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode or
when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the
main focus point remains highlighted after the other focus
points have turned off.
A 3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.
88
The following AF-area modes can be selected during live view:
• ! Face-priority AF: Use for portraits.
The
camera automatically detects and
focuses on portrait subjects; the
selected subject is indicated by a
double yellow border (if multiple faces
are detected, the camera will focus on
the closest subject; to choose a
different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera can no
longer detect the subject (because, for example, the subject
has turned to face away from the camera), the border will no
longer be displayed.
• $ Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots
of landscapes and other non-portrait
subjects.
• % Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus
on a selected spot in the frame.
A
tripod is recommended.
89
• & Subject-tracking AF: Use the multi
selector to position the focus point over
your subject and press J to start
tracking.
The focus point will track the
selected subject as it moves through
the frame.
To end tracking, press J
again.
Note that the camera may be
unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame
or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color,
or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or
similar in color or brightness to the background.
A Manual Focus-Point Selection
The multi selector can be used
to select the focus point.
Rotating the focus selector lock
to L disables manual focus-point
selection.
Focus selector lock
90
AF-area mode can be selected
by pressing the AF-mode
button and rotating the sub-
command dial until the desired
setting is displayed.
Control panel Viewfinder Monitor
A AF-Area Mode (Viewfinder Photography)
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
AF-area mode Control panel Viewfinder
Single-point AF
9-point dynamic-area AF
*
21-point dynamic-area AF
*
51-point dynamic-area AF
*
3D-tracking
Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder.
Remaining focus points provide
information to assist focus operation.
AF-mode button Sub-command
dial
91
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Use an AF-S lens.
The desired results may not be achieved with other
lenses or teleconverters.
Note that in live view, autofocus is slower and
the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
The
focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is
unable to focus.
The camera may be unable to focus in the following
situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light
source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
A Focus-Point Selection
Except in subject-tracking AF, pressing J during focus-point selection
selects the center focus point. In subject-tracking AF, pressing J starts
subject tracking instead. Manual focus-point selection is not available
in auto-area AF or if a face is detected when face-priority AF is selected
in live view.
92
A See Also
Viewfinder photography: For information on choosing when the focus
point is illuminated, see Custom Setting a5 (Focus point illumination)
> AF point illumination (0 277).
For information on setting focus-
point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting a6 (Focus point
wrap-around, 0 277).
For information on choosing the number of
focus points that can be selected using the multi selector, see Custom
Setting a7 (Number of focus points, 0 277).
For information on
choosing separate focus points for vertical and horizontal orientations,
see Custom Setting a8 (Store points by orientation, 0 277).
Viewfinder photography/live view: See Custom Setting f5 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (0 285) for information on
using the main command dial to choose the AF-area mode.
93
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after
focusing, making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be
in a focus point in the final composition.
If the camera is unable
to focus using autofocus (0 96), focus lock can also be used to
recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at
the same distance as your original subject.
Focus lock is most
effective when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for
AF-area mode (0 86).
1 Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
initiate focus.
Check that the in-focus indicator (I)
appears in the viewfinder (viewfinder photography) or that
the focus point has turned green (live view).
Viewfinder photography Live view
94
2 Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes (viewfinder
photography): With the shutter-release
button pressed halfway (q), press the
A AE-L/AF-L button (w) to lock focus.
Focus will remain locked while the
A AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if
you later remove your finger from the
shutter-release button.
AF-S (viewfinder photography) and live view: Focus locks
automatically and remain locked until you remove your
finger from the shutter-release button.
Focus can also be
locked by pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button (see above).
Shutter-release button
A AE-L/AF-L button
95
3 Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(AF-S and live view) or keep the A AE-L/AF-L button
pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be
taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect.
If the subject moves, focus
again at the new distance.
Viewfinder photography Live view
A See Also
Pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0 107).
See Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 285) for
information on choosing the role played by the A AE-L/AF-L button.
96
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus.
In these cases, focus manually
(0 97) or use focus lock (0 93) to focus on another subject at the same
distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a
skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that
are small or lack variation in brightness.
97
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support
autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does
not produce the desired results (0 96).
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus
mode switch (if present) and
camera focus-mode selector
to M.
• Manual focus lenses: Focus manually.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus
ring until the subject is in focus.
Photographs can be taken at any time,
even when the image is not in focus.
Manual Focus
D AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch set to M and
the camera focus-mode selector set to AF.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera or lens.
This does not apply to
AF-S lenses, which can be used in M mode without setting the
camera focus-mode selector to M.
Focus-mode selector
98
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder focus indicator can be
used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of
the 51 focus points).
After positioning
the subject in the selected focus point,
press the shutter-release button halfway
and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed.
Note that with the subjects listed on page 96, the in-
focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is
not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
For information on using the electronic rangefinder with
optional AF-S/AF-I teleconverters, see page 307.
A Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between
your subject and the camera, measure
from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body.
The distance between the
lens mounting flange and the focal
plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
A Live View
Press the X (T) button to zoom in for
precise focus in live view (0 38).
Focal plane mark
46.5 mm
X (T) button
99
ISO Sensitivity
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the
amount of light available.
Choose from settings that range from
ISO 100 to ISO 25600 in steps equivalent to
1
/
3 EV.
Auto, scene,
and special effect modes also offer an AUTO option, which allows
the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to
lighting conditions.
Settings of Hi BW1 (equivalent to ISO 51200)
and Hi BW2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are also available, but
note that pictures taken with either setting are recorded in
monochrome using the options selected for Set Picture
Control > Monochrome in the photo shooting menu (0 130).
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an
exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures.
Modes Options
P, S , A , M 100–25600; Hi BW1 and Hi BW2
%
Auto
Other shooting
modes
Auto; 100–25600
100
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted
by pressing the W (S) button
and rotating the main
command dial until the desired
setting is displayed.
Control panel
Viewfinder Information display
A The Photo Shooting Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted from the photo shooting menu.
Choose ISO sensitivity settings in photo shooting menu to adjust
settings for photographs (0 271).
A Live View
In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor.
W (S) button Main command
dial
101
❚❚ Hi BW1/Hi BW2
In P, S, A, and M modes, Hi BW1 and Hi BW2
can be selected using the ISO sensitivity
settings (0 271) > ISO sensitivity
option in the photo shooting menu.
A Hi ISO Command Dial Access
If On is chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Hi ISO command dial
access (0 271), Hi BW1 and Hi BW2 can be selected by pressing the
W (S) button and rotating the main command dial.
If Off is chosen
for Hi ISO command dial access while Hi BW1 or Hi BW2 is selected,
rotating the main command dial will have no effect, but ISO sensitivity
can still be adjusted from the menus.
A Restrictions on Hi BW1 and Hi BW2
Note the following restrictions when using Hi BW1 or Hi BW2:
• Image quality and size can not be changed when Hi BW1 or Hi BW2 is
selected.
Pictures shot with NEF (RAW) selected for image quality
are recorded in fine-quality JPEG format.
If an NEF (RAW) + JPEG
option is selected, only the JPEG image will be recorded.
• Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 102), Active D-Lighting (0 139), HDR
(0 141), multiple exposure (0 211), and time-lapse photography
(0 171) are not available.
A See Also
For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom
Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value; 0 278).
For information on
adjusting ISO sensitivity without using the W (S) button, see
Custom Setting d8 (Easy ISO; 0 281).
For information on using the
High ISO NR option in the shooting menus to reduce noise at high ISO
sensitivities, see pages 271 and 275.
102
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu, ISO sensitivity
will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is
adjusted appropriately when the flash is used).
1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control.
Select ISO sensitivity settings in the
photo shooting menu, highlight Auto
ISO sensitivity control and press 2.
2 Select On.
Highlight On and press J (if Off is
selected, ISO sensitivity will remain
fixed at the value selected by the
user).
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
(P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
103
3 Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto ISO
sensitivity can be selected using
Maximum sensitivity (note that if the
ISO sensitivity selected by the user is
higher than that chosen for
Maximum sensitivity, the value
selected by the user will be used instead).
In modes P and A,
sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would
result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed (
1
/
4000–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, ISO sensitivity
will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed
selected by the user).
If Auto is selected, the camera will
choose the minimum shutter speed based on the focal
length of the lens.
Press J to exit when settings are
complete.
ISO AUTO is displayed when On is
selected.
When sensitivity is altered
from the value selected by the user,
these indicators flash and the altered
value is shown in the control panel.
A Live View
In live view, the auto ISO sensitivity control indicator is displayed in the
monitor.
104
A Minimum Shutter Speed
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto
and pressing 2: for example, values faster than those usually selected
automatically can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur. Note,
however, that Auto functions only with CPU lenses; if a non-CPU lens is
used without lens data, minimum shutter speed is fixed at
1
/
30 s.
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum
exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for
Maximum sensitivity.
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
When a flash is used, minimum shutter speed will be set to the value
selected for Minimum shutter speed unless this value is faster than
Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 282) or slower than Custom
Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed, 0 283), in which case the value
selected for Custom Setting e2 will be used instead.
Note that ISO
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available
with the built-in flash and the optional flash units listed on page 311),
possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.
A Enabling and Disabling Auto ISO Senstivity Control
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off by pressing the
W (S) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
ISO AUTO is
displayed when auto ISO sensitivity control is on.
105
Exposure
Choose how the camera sets exposure in P, S, A, and M modes (in
other modes, the camera selects the metering method
automatically).
Metering (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Option Description
a
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations.
Camera
meters a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D
lenses (0 307), distance information (3D color matrix metering
II; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering II,
which does not include 3D distance information).
Z
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area for
viewfinder photography can be selected using Custom Setting
b4, Center-weighted area, 0 278; if non-CPU lens is attached,
area is equivalent to circle 8 mm in diameter).
Classic meter for
portraits; recommended when using filters with an exposure
factor (filter factor) over 1×.
b
Spot: Camera meters circle centered on current focus point,
making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens
is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center
focus point).
Diameter of circle for viewfinder photography is
3.5 mm (0.14 in.), or approximately 2.5% of frame.
Ensures that
subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is
much brighter or darker.
106
To choose a metering option, press the Z (Q) button and
rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed.
Z (Q) button Main command
dial
Control panel
A Live View
In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor.
A Non-CPU Lens Data
Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses
using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu (0 225)
allows the camera to use color matrix metering when matrix is
selected.
Center-weighted metering will be used if matrix metering is
selected with non-CPU lenses for which lens data have not been
supplied.
A See Also
For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure
for each metering method, see Custom Setting b5 (Fine-tune optimal
exposure, 0 278).
107
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
center-weighted metering and spot metering (0 105) to meter
exposure.
1 Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutter-
release button halfway.
With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway and the subject positioned
in the focus point, press the A AE-L/
AF-L button to lock focus and
exposure (if you are using autofocus,
confirm that the camera is in focus;
0 34).
While exposure lock is in effect, an
AE-L indicator will appear in the
viewfinder and the monitor.
2 Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the A AE-L/AF-L
button pressed,
recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Autoexposure Lock
Shutter-release button
A AE-L/AF-L button
108
A Spot Metering
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered at the
selected focus point (0 105).
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Mode Setting
P Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 52)
S Shutter speed
A Aperture
Note that metering can not be changed while exposure lock is in
effect.
A See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
0 279), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
For information on changing the role of the A AE-L/AF-L
button, see Custom Setting f4 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 285).
109
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker.
It
is most effective when used with center-weighted or spot
metering (0 105).
Choose from values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of
1
/
3 EV.
In general, positive values make the subject brighter while
negative values make it darker.
To choose a value for exposure
compensation, press the E button and
rotate the main command dial until the
desired value is displayed.
Exposure Compensation
(P, S, A, M, SCENE, and % Modes Only)
–1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
±0 EV –0.3 (–
1
/
3)EV +2.0EV
E button
Main command dial
110
At values other than ±0.0, the 0 at the
center of the exposure indicators will
flash (modes P, S, A, SCENE, and %) and a
E icon will be displayed in the control
panel and viewfinder after you release
the E button.
The current value for
exposure compensation can be
confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the E button.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.
Except in SCENE and % modes, exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
SCENE and % modes, exposure compensation will be reset when
another mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
A Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.
A Exposure Compensation (Live View)
When the live view selector is rotated to C, exposure compensation
can be set to values between –5 and +5 EV, but only values between
–3 and +3 can be previewed in the monitor.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for
exposure cntrl, 0 278).
For information on making adjustments to
exposure compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom
Setting b3 (Easy exposure compensation, 0 278).
For information
on restricting the effects of exposure compensation to the background
when using a flash for foreground lighting, see Custom Setting e4
(Exposure comp. for flash, 0 283).
For information on automatically
varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see
page 197.
111
White Balance (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source.
In modes other than P, S, A, and M, white balance
is set automatically by the camera.
Auto white balance is
recommended for most light sources in P, S, A, and M modes, but
other values can be selected if necessary according to the type
of source:
Option Color temp.
*
v
Auto
3500–8000 K
Normal
Keep warm lighting colors
J
Incandescent
3000 K
I
Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
2700 K
Warm-white fluorescent
3000 K
White fluorescent
3700 K
Cool-white fluorescent
4200 K
Day white fluorescent
5000 K
Daylight fluorescent
6500 K
High temp. mercury-vapor
7200 K
H
Direct sunlight
5200 K
N
Flash
5400 K
G
Cloudy
6000 K
M
Shade
8000 K
K
Choose color temp. (0 117)
2500–10,000 K
L
Preset manual (0 120)
—
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
112
White balance is set by pressing the L (U) button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed.
L (U) button Main command
dial
Information display
A Live View
In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor.
A The Shooting Menus
White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in
either of the shooting menus (0 269, 274), which also can be used to
fine-tune white balance (0 114) or measure a value for preset manual
white balance (0 120).
The Auto option in the White balance menu
offers a choice of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which
preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting, while
the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from
the bulb types.
The item in the movie shooting menu offers a Same as
photo settings option that sets the white balance for movies to the
same as that used for photographs.
A Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large
studio flash units.
Use preset manual white balance or set white
balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.
113
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions.
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths.
While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red.
Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors “Cooler” (bluer) colors
q
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
w
J (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K
e
I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
r
I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
t
I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
y
H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
u
N (flash): 5400 K
i
G (cloudy): 6000 K
o
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
!0
I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
!1
M (shade): 8000 K
Note: All figures are approximate.
114
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.), white balance
can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of
the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an
image.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
To fine-tune white balance from the shooting menus, select
White balance and follow the steps below.
1 Display fine-tuning options.
Highlight a white balance option and
press 2 (if a sub-menu is displayed,
select the desired option and press 2
again to display fine-tuning options;
for information on fine-tuning preset
manual white balance, see page 129).
2 Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance. White balance can be
fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B)
axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25. The
horizontal (amber-blue) axis
corresponds to color temperature,
while the vertical (green-magenta)
axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color
compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal axis is ruled in
increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in
increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
Fine-Tuning White Balance
Coordinates
Adjustment
115
3 Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to the shooting menus.
❚❚ The L (U) Button
At settings other than K
(Choose color temp.) and L
(Preset manual), the L (U)
button can be used to fine-tune
white balance on the amber
(A)–blue (B) axis (0 114; to fine-
tune white balance when L is
selected, use the shooting
menus as described on page
129).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command
dial to fine-tune white balance in steps of 0.5 (with each full
increment equivalent to about 5 mired) until the desired value is
displayed.
Rotating the sub-command dial to the left increases
the amount of amber (A).
Rotating the sub-command dial to the
right increases the amount of blue (B).
Control panel Information display
A Live View
In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor.
L (U) button Sub-command
dial
116
A White Balance Fine-Tuning
If white balance has been fine-tuned, an asterisk (“E”) will be displayed
next to the white balance setting.
Note that the colors on the fine-
tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor
to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J (incandescent) is selected
for white balance will make photographs slightly “colder” but will not
actually make them blue.
Information display Shooting display
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures.
For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K.
Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10
6
, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
A See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 284), the camera will create several images each
time the shutter is released.
White balance will be varied with each
image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance
(0 202).
117
Follow the steps below to choose a color temperature when
K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
Color temperature can be selected using the White balance
options in the shooting menus. Enter values for the amber–blue
and green–magenta axes (0 114) as described below.
1 Select Choose color temp.
Select White balance in either of the
shooting menus, then highlight
Choose color temp. and press 2.
2 Select a value for amber-blue.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and
press 1 or 3 to change.
Choosing a Color Temperature
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting.
Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources.
With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
Value for amber (A)-
blue (B) axis
118
3 Select a value for green-magenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the G
(green) or M (magenta) axis and press
1 or 3 to select a value.
4 Press J.
Press J to save changes and return to
the shooting menus.
If a value other
than 0 is selected for the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis, an asterisk (“E”) will
be displayed next to the K icon.
Value for green (G)-
magenta (M) axis
119
❚❚ The L (U) Button
When K (Choose color temp.)
is selected, the L (U) button
can be used to select the color
temperature, although only for
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis.
Press the L (U) button and
rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired value is
displayed (adjustments are
made in mireds; 0 116).
To
enter a color temperature
directly, press the L (U)
button and press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit and press 1 or 3 to
change.
Control panel Information display
A Live View
In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor.
L (U) button Sub-command
dial
120
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast.
The camera can store up to
six values for preset manual white balance in presets d-1
through d-6.
Two methods are available for setting preset
manual white balance:
Viewfinder Photography
1 Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that
will be used in the final photograph.
In studio settings, a
standard gray panel can be used as a reference object.
Note
that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when
measuring white balance; in mode M, adjust exposure so that
the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 57).
Preset Manual
Method Description
Direct measurement
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photo and white
balance measured by camera.
In live view, white
balance can be measured in a selected area of the
frame (spot white balance, 0 124).
Copy from existing
photograph
White balance is copied from photo on memory
card (0 127).
121
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial
until L is displayed in the information display.
3 Select a preset.
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed
in the information display.
L (U) button Main command
dial
Information display
L (U) button Sub-command
dial
Information display
A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)
Preset manual white balance can not be measured while you are
shooting an HDR photograph (0 141) or multiple exposure (0 211), or
when Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign
shutter button, 0 288) and the live view selector is rotated to 1.
122
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the L (U) button briefly
and then press the button until D
starts to flash in the control panel
and viewfinder.
5 Measure white balance.
In the few seconds before the
indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the
viewfinder and press the shutter-release button all the way
down.
The camera will measure a value for white balance and
store it in the preset selected in Step 3.
No photograph will
be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even
when the camera is not in focus.
A Protected Presets
If the current preset is protected (0 129), 3 or Prt will flash in the
control panel, viewfinder, and information display if you attempt to
measure a new value.
Control panel
Viewfinder
123
6 Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will
flash in the control panel, while the
viewfinder will show a flashing a.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to exit to shooting mode.
If lighting is too dark or too bright,
the camera may be unable to
measure white balance.
A flashing
ba will appear in the control
panel and viewfinder.
Press the
shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 5 and measure white
balance again.
D Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while
the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the
time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279).
A Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White
balance option in either of the shooting
menus displays the dialog shown at right;
highlight a preset and press J.
If no value
currently exists for the selected preset, white
balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as
Direct sunlight.
Control panel
Viewfinder
Control panel
Viewfinder
124
Live View (Spot White Balance)
During live view, white balance can be measured directly from
any white or gray object in the frame.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in
the camera monitor.
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the L (U) button and rotate the main command dial
until L is displayed in the monitor.
L (U) button Main command
dial
Monitor
a button
125
3 Select a preset.
Press the L (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed
in the monitor.
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the L (U) button briefly
and then press the button until the
L icon in the monitor starts to flash.
A spot white balance target (r) will
be displayed at the selected focus
point.
5 Position the target over a white or grey area.
While L flashes in the display, use
the multi selector to position the r
over a white or grey area of the
subject.
To zoom the area around the
target in for more precise positioning,
press the X (T) button.
L (U) button Sub-command
dial
Monitor
Monitor
126
6 Measure white balance.
Press J or press the shutter-release
button all the way down to measure
white balance.
The time available to
measure white balance is that
selected for Custom Setting c4
(Monitor off delay)> Live view
(0 279).
If the camera is unable to measure
white balance, the message shown at
right will be displayed.
Choose a new
white balance target and repeat the
process from Step 5.
7 Exit direct measurement mode.
Press the L (U) button to exit direct measurement mode.
When Preset manual is selected for
White balance in either of the
shooting menus, the position of the
target used to measure preset manual
white balance will be displayed on
presets recorded during live view.
A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View)
Preset manual white balance can not be measured when Record
movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button,
0 288) and the live view selector is rotated to 1.
Preset manual white
balance can not be set while an HDR exposure is in progress (0 141).
127
Managing Presets
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select Preset manual.
Select White balance in either of the
shooting menus, then highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1
to d-6) and press W (S).
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
W (S) button
128
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image.
5 Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset.
If the highlighted
photograph has a comment (0 291), the comment will be
copied to the comment for the selected preset.
A Choosing a Source Image
To view the image highlighted in Step 4 full frame, press and hold the
X (T) button.
X (T) button
129
A Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white
balance preset (d-1– d-6) and press 2 to
select another preset.
A Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white
balance as described on page 114.
A Edit Comment
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36
characters for the current white-balance
preset, select Edit comment in the preset
manual white balance menu and enter a
comment as described on page 136.
A Protect
To protect the current white-balance preset,
select Protect in the preset manual white
balance menu, then highlight On and press
J. Protected presets can not be modified
and the Fine-tune and Edit comment
options can not be used.
130
Image Enhancement
In P, S, A, and M modes, your choice of Picture Control determines
how pictures are processed (in other modes, the camera selects
a Picture Control automatically).
Selecting a Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Picture Controls (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Option Description
Q
Standard
Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
R
Neutral
Minimal processing for natural results.
Choose for
photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
S
Vivid
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
colors.
T
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
e
Portrait
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
f
Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
q
Flat
Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from
highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs that
will later be extensively processed or retouched.
A The Movie Shooting Menu
The Set Picture Control option in the movie shooting menu also
offers a Same as photo settings option that sets the Picture Control
for movies to the same as that used for photographs.
131
1 Select Set Picture Control.
Highlight Set Picture Control in
either of the shooting menus and
press 2.
2 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a Picture Control and press
J.
A Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
shooting menus (0 135).
Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and
compatible software (0 138).
A The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the display.
Information display Shooting display
132
Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 135) can be
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
in the Picture Control list (0 130) and
press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
sub-command dial to choose a value
in increments of 0.25 (0 133).
Repeat
this step until all settings have been
adjusted, or select a preset combination of settings by using
the multi selector to choose Quick adjust.
Default settings
can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button.
3 Press J.
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified
from default settings are indicated by an
asterisk (“E”).
133
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option Description
Quick adjust
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture
Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).
Not available with Neutral, Monochrome, Flat, or
custom Picture Controls (0 135).
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Sharpening
Control the sharpness of outlines.
Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
scene.
Clarity
Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the camera
adjust clarity automatically.
Depending on the scene,
shadows may appear around bright objects or halos
may appear around dark objects at some settings.
Clarity is not applied to movies.
Contrast
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera
adjust contrast automatically.
Brightness
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
highlights or shadows.
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
Saturation
Control the vividness of colors.
Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of
scene.
Hue Adjust hue.
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
Filter
effects
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
photographs (0 134).
Toning
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs
(0 135).
134
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
Use a type G, E,
or D lens for best results.
A Switching Between Manual and Auto
Press the X (T) button to switch back
and forth between manual and auto (A)
settings for sharpening, clarity, contrast, and
saturation.
A Custom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
A Previous Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting.
Use this as
a reference when adjusting settings.
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
Option Description
Y Yellow Enhances contrast.
Can be used to tone down the
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more
contrast than orange.
O Orange
R Red
G Green Softens skin tones.
Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more
pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters.
135
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Select Manage Picture Control.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in
either of the shooting menus and
press 2.
2 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed to
Step 5 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options.
Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation.
Saturation control is not
available when B&W (black-and-white) is
selected.
136
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 133 for more information.
To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the
O (Q) button.
Press J when settings
are complete.
5 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
6 Name the Picture Control.
The text-entry dialog shown at right
will be displayed.
By default, new
Picture Controls are named by adding
a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the
existing Picture Control; to use the
default name, proceed to Step 7.
To
move the cursor in the name area,
hold the W (S) button and press 4 or 2.
To enter a new
letter at the current cursor position, use the multi selector to
highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and
press J.
To delete the character at the current cursor
position, press the O (Q) button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long.
Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
Keyboard area
Name area
137
7 Press X (T).
Press the X (T) button to save
changes and exit.
The new Picture
Control will appear in the Picture
Control list.
A Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at
any time using the Rename option in the
Manage Picture Control menu.
A Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture
Control menu can be used to delete
selected custom Picture Controls when they
are no longer needed.
A The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is
indicated by an icon in the top right corner
of the edit display.
Original Picture
Control icon
X (T) button
138
A Sharing Custom Picture Controls
The Load/save item in the Manage Picture
Control menu offers the options listed
below.
Use these options to copy custom
Picture Controls to and from memory cards
(these options are available only with the
memory card in Slot 1 and can not be used
with the card in Slot 2).
Once copied to
memory cards, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or
compatible software.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from the
camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to
custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and name
them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
139
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast.
Use for high
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day.
It is most effective when used
with matrix metering (0 105).
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Active D-Lighting off Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
D “Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the photo shooting menu adjusts
exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the
D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 294) brightens shadows in
images after shooting.
140
To use Active D-Lighting:
1 Select Active D-Lighting.
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight the desired option and
press J.
If YAuto is selected, the
camera will automatically adjust
Active D-Lighting according to
shooting conditions (in mode M,
however, Y Auto is equivalent to
Q Normal).
D Active D-Lighting
With some subjects, you may notice uneven shading, shadows around
bright objects, or halos around dark objects.
A See Also
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set, 0 284), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots (0 207).
If desired, the Fn button and main command
dial can be used to select Active D-Lighting; for more information, see
Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn button, 0 284).
141
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures.
HDR is most effective when
used with matrix metering (0 105; with spot or center-weighted
metering and a non-CPU lens, a strength of Auto is equivalent to
Normal).
It can not be used to record NEF (RAW) images.
Flash
lighting, bracketing (0 197), multiple exposure (0 211), and
time-lapse photography (0 171) can not be used while HDR is in
effect and shutter speeds of A and % are not available.
1 Select HDR (high dynamic range).
Highlight HDR (high dynamic range)
in the photo shooting menu and
press 2.
+
First exposure (darker) Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
142
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the following and
press J.
• To take a series of HDR photographs, select
6 On (series).
HDR shooting will
continue until you select Off for
HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On
(single photo).
Normal shooting will resume automatically
after you have created a single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, an l icon will be displayed
in the viewfinder.
3 Choose the HDR strength.
To choose the difference in exposure
between the two shots (HDR
strength), highlight HDR strength
and press 2.
Highlight the desired option and
press J.
If Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically adjust HDR
strength to suit the scene.
Viewfinder
143
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures
when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
lj
will flash in the control panel and
l l in the viewfinder while the
images are combined; no
photographs can be taken until
recording is complete.
Regardless of
the option currently selected for
release mode, only one photograph
will be taken each time the shutter-
release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
The
l icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out.
The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting.
Use
of a tripod is recommended.
Depending on the scene, the effect may
not be visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos
may appear around dark objects. Uneven shading may be visible with
some subjects.
A Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer
shooting will end after a single shot).
Control panel
Viewfinder
144
Flash Photography
The built-in flash can be used not only when natural lighting is
inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to add a
catch light to the subject’s eyes.
Auto Pop-up Modes
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, and g modes, the built-in flash
automatically pops up and fires as required.
1 Choose a flash mode.
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the main
command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed.
Using the Built-in Flash
M (Y) button Main command
dial
Information display
A Live View
In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor.
145
2 Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as
required when the shutter-
release button is pressed
halfway and fire when a
photograph is taken.
If the
flash does not pop up
automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand.
Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the flash.
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
Auto flash: When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit, the
flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway and fires as required.
Not available in o
mode.
Auto with red-eye reduction: Use for portraits. The flash pops up
and fires as required, but before it fires the red-eye reduction
lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.”
Not available in o mode.
Auto slow sync with red-eye reduction: As for auto with red-eye
reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to
capture background lighting.
Use for portraits taken at night
or under low light.
Available in o mode.
Auto slow sync: Slow shutter speeds are used to capture
background lighting in shots taken at night or under low
light.
Available in o mode.
j
Off: The flash does not fire.
146
Manual Pop-up Modes
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually.
The
flash will not fire if it is not raised.
1 Raise the flash.
Press the M (Y) button to raise the
flash.
Note that if the flash is off or an
optional external flash unit is
attached, the built-in flash will not
pop up; proceed to Step 2.
2 Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the main
command dial until the desired flash mode is displayed.
3 Take pictures.
If an option other than j is selected, the flash will fire
whenever a picture is taken.
M (Y) button Main command
dial
Information display
A Live View
In live view, the selected option is displayed in the monitor.
M (Y) button
147
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
Fill flash: The flash fires with every shot.
Red-eye reduction: Use for portraits. The flash fires with every
shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp lights to
help reduce “red-eye.”
Not available in 0 mode.
Red-eye reduction with slow sync: As for “red-eye reduction”, above,
except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture
background lighting at night or under low light.
Use when
you want to include background lighting in portraits.
Not
available in modes S, M, and 0.
Slow sync: As for “fill flash”, above, except that shutter speed
slows automatically to capture background lighting at night
or under low light.
Use when you want to capture both
subject and background.
Not available in modes S, M, and 0.
Slow rear-curtain sync: As for “rear-curtain sync”, below, except
that shutter speed slows automatically to capture
background lighting at night or under low light.
Use when
you want to capture both subject and background.
Not
available in modes S, M, and 0.
S is displayed when
setting is complete.
Rear-curtain sync: The flash fires just before the shutter closes,
creating a stream of light behind moving light sources as
shown below at right. Not available in modes P, A, and 0.
j
Off: The flash does not fire.
Not available in 0 mode.
Front-curtain sync Rear-curtain sync
148
A Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
D The Built-in Flash
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
The flash has a minimum
range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range of zoom
lenses with a macro function.
i-TTL flash control is available at ISO
sensitivities between 100 and 12800; at values over 12800, the desired
results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture values.
If the flash fires in continuous release modes (0 66), only one picture
will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it
has been used for several consecutive shots.
The flash can be used
again after a short pause.
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
The following shutter speeds are available with the built-in flash.
Mode Shutter speed
i, p, n, s, w, 0, g, P
*
, A
*
1
/
250–
1
/
60 s
k
1
/
250–
1
/
30 s
o
1
/
250–1 s
S
*
1
/
250–30 s
M
*
1
/
250–30 s, A, %
*Speeds as fast as
1
/
8000 s are available with optional flash units that support auto FP high-
speed sync when 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom
Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 282).
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected,
shutter speeds as fast as
1
/
320 s are available with the built-in flash.
149
A Flash Control Mode
The camera supports the following i-TTL flash control modes:
• i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash emits series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by
2016-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range
information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for
natural balance between main subject and ambient background
lighting.
If type G, E, or D lens is used, distance information is
included when calculating flash output.
Precision of calculation can
be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length
and maximum aperture; see page 224).
Not available when spot
metering is used.
• Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring
lighting in frame to standard level; brightness of background is not
taken into account.
Recommended for shots in which main subject is
emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure
compensation is used.
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR is
activated automatically when spot metering is selected.
A Metering
Select matrix or center-weighted metering to activate i-TTL balanced
fill-flash for digital SLR.
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR is
activated automatically when spot metering is selected.
150
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of Approximate range
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 m ft
1.4 2 2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 0.7–8.5 2ft 4in.–27ft 10in.
2 2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 22 0.6–6.0 2ft–19ft 8in.
2.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 22 32 0.6–4.2 2ft–13ft 9in.
4 5.6 8 11 16 22 32 — 0.6–3.0 2ft–9ft 10in.
5.6 8 11 16 22 32 — — 0.6–2.1 2ft–6ft 10in.
8 11 16 22 32 — — — 0.6–1.5 2ft–4ft 11in.
11 16 22 32 — — — — 0.6–1.1 2ft–3ft 7in.
16 22 32 — — — — — 0.6–0.8 2ft–2ft 7in.
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft).
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
2.8 3.5 4 5 5.6 7.1 8 10
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
A See Also
See page 153 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered
subject before recomposing a photograph.
Menu options relevant to this section are listed below.
• Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed): Enable or disable auto FP high-
speed sync and choose a flash sync speed (0 282)
• Custom Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed): Choose the slowest shutter
speed available when using the flash (0 283)
• Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash): Choose a flash control
mode (0 283)
151
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to
+1EV in increments of
1
/
3 EV, changing the brightness of the
main subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
Press the M (Y) button and
rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired value is
displayed.
In general, choose
positive values to make the
main subject brighter, negative
values to make it darker.
Flash Compensation (P, S, A, M, and SCENE Modes Only)
Control panel Information display
±0 EV –0.3 (–
1
/
3)EV +1.0EV
A Live View
In live view, the selected value is displayed in the monitor.
M (Y) button Sub-command
dial
152
At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will be displayed after you
release the M (Y) button.
The current value for flash
compensation can be confirmed by pressing the M (Y) button.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0.
Except in SCENE mode, flash
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
SCENE mode, flash compensation will be reset when another
mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
A Optional Flash Units
The flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added
to the flash compensation selected with the camera.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
flash compensation, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure
cntrl, 0 278).
For information on choosing how flash and exposure
compensation combine, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for
flash, 0 283).
For information on automatically varying flash level
over a series of shots, see page 197.
153
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring
that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the
subject is not positioned in the center of the frame.
Flash output
is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and
aperture.
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Select FV lock as the “Press” option
for Custom Setting f2 (Assign Fn
button, 0 284), f3 (Assign preview
button, 0 285), or f4 (Assign AE-L/
AF-L button, 0 285).
2 Raise the flash.
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash can
be raised by pressing the M (Y)
button.
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, and
g modes, the flash will pop up
automatically when required.
3 Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
FV Lock
M (Y) button
154
4 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready
indicator (M) is displayed, press the
button selected in Step 1.
The flash will emit a monitor
preflash to determine the appropriate flash level.
Flash
output will be locked at this level and an FV lock icon (e) will
appear in the display.
5 Recompose the photograph.
6 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot.
If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
7 Release FV lock.
Press the button selected in Step 1 to release FV lock.
Confirm that the FV lock icon (e) is no longer displayed.
A Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL is selected for
Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 0 283).
Note that
when commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3, you will
need to set the flash control mode for the master or at least one
remote group to TTL or AA.
155
A Metering
When FV lock is used with the built-in flash and no additional flash
units, the camera meters a 4 mm circle in the center of the frame.
When the built-in flash is used with optional flash units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting), the camera meters the entire frame.
156
Remote Control Photography
The optional ML-L3 remote control (0 319) can be used to
reduce camera shake or for self-portraits.
1 Select Remote control mode (ML-L3).
Highlight Remote control mode
(ML-L3) in the photo shooting menu
and press 2.
2 Choose a remote control mode.
Highlight one of the following options and press J.
3 Frame the photograph.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a
stable, level surface.
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control
Option Description
%
Delayed remote
Shutter is released 2 s after ML-L3 shutter-
release button is pressed.
$
Quick-response
remote
Shutter is released when ML-L3 shutter-release
button is pressed.
&
Remote
mirror-up
Press ML-L3 shutter-release button once to
raise mirror, again to release shutter and take
photograph.
Prevents blur caused by camera
moving when mirror is raised.
7
Off
The shutter can not be released using the
ML-L3.
157
4 Take the photograph.
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less,
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at
either of the infrared receivers on the
camera (0 2, 4) and press the ML-L3
shutter-release button.
In delayed
remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
light for about two seconds before the
shutter is released.
In quick-response remote mode, the self-
timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released.
In
remote mirror-up mode, pressing the ML-L3 shutter-release
button once raises the mirror; the shutter will be released and
the self-timer lamp will flash after 30 s or when the button is
pressed a second time.
A Release Mode
When an optional ML-L3 remote control is used, the release mode
selected with the release mode dial (0 66) is ignored in favor of the
option selected for Remote control mode (ML-L3) in the photo
shooting menu.
D Before Using Optional ML-L3 Remote Controls
Before using the remote control for the first time, remove the clear
plastic battery-insulator sheet.
158
A Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes
(0 146), press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the
flash-ready indicator (M) to be displayed (0 36).
Shooting will be
interrupted if the flash is raised while remote control mode is in effect.
If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3
shutter-release button once the flash has charged.
In auto pop-up
modes (0 144), the flash will begin charging when remote control
mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically pop up
and fire when required.
In flash modes that support red-eye reduction, the red-eye reduction
lamp will light for about one second before the shutter is released.
In
delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will light for two seconds,
followed by the red-eye reduction lamp which lights for one second
before the shutter is released.
A Focusing in Remote Control Mode
The camera will not adjust focus continuously when continuous-servo
autofocus is selected; note however that regardless of the autofocus
mode selected, you can focus by pressing the camera shutter-release
button halfway before shooting.
If auto- or single-servo autofocus is
selected or the camera is in live view in delayed or quick-response
remote mode, the camera will automatically adjust focus before
shooting; if the camera is unable to focus in viewfinder photography, it
will return to stand-by without releasing the shutter.
A Remote Mirror-up Mode
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the viewfinder
and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
159
A Exiting Remote Control Mode
Remote control is cancelled automatically if no photograph is taken
before the time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration
(ML-L3), 0 279), Off is selected for Remote control mode (ML-L3), a
two-button reset is performed (0 194), or shooting options are reset
using Reset photo shooting menu (0 268).
D Assign Shutter Button
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter
button, 0 288), the ML-L3 can not be used when the live view selector
is rotated to 1.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in
photographs or interfering with exposure, remove the rubber eyecup
and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 70).
A See Also
For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain
in stand-by mode waiting for a signal from the remote control, see
Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration (ML-L3); 0 279). For
information on controlling the beeps that sound when the remote
control is used, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 280).
160
When the camera is used with optional WR-1 and WR-R10/
WR-T10 (0 319) wireless remote controllers, the shutter-release
buttons on the WR-1 and WR-T10 perform the same functions as
the camera shutter-release button, allowing remote continuous
and self-timer photography.
WR-1 Wireless Remote Controllers
The WR-1 can function as either a transmitter or a receiver and is
used in combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or
WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a WR-1 can be
connected to the accessory terminal for use as a receiver,
allowing camera settings to be changed or the shutter to be
released remotely by another WR-1 acting as a transmitter.
WR-R10/WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controllers
When a WR-R10 (transceiver) is connected to the camera, the
shutter can be released using a WR-T10 (transmitter).
Wireless Remote Controllers
161
Recording and Viewing Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to 1.
2 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in
the camera monitor as it would
appear in the actual movie, modified
for the effects of exposure.
The
subject will no longer be visible in the
viewfinder.
Recording Movies
A Aperture Selection (Modes A and M)
In modes A and M, choose an aperture
before pressing the a button to start live
view.
A The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0 165) indicates that movies can not be recorded.
Live view selector
a button
162
3 Focus.
Frame the opening shot and focus
(press the X/T button to zoom in
for precise focus as described on page
38; for more information on focusing during movie recording,
see page 83).
Note that the number of subjects that can be
detected in face-priority AF drops during movie recording.
A Exposure
The exposure settings available vary with the shooting mode:
Shutter
speed
ISO
sensitivity
(0 275)
Exposure
compensation
Metering
P, S — — ✔ ✔
A — — ✔ ✔
M ✔ ✔ — ✔
SCENE, % — — ✔ —
Other shooting
modes
— — — —
In mode M, shutter speed can be set to values between
1
/
25 s and
1
/
8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame
rate; 0 166).
Spot metering is not available.
If the result is over- or
under-exposed, exit and restart live view.
A White Balance
In modes P, S, A, and M, white balance can be set at any time by
pressing the L (U) button and rotating the main command dial
(0 111).
163
4 Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording.
A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor.
Exposure can be locked by
pressing the A AE-L/AF-L button
(0 107) or altered by up to ±3 EV in
steps of
1
/
3 EV using exposure
compensation (0 109).
In autofocus
mode, the camera can be refocused
by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway.
A Audio
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording
(0 1).
Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made
by the camera or lens during autofocus or vibration reduction.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
164
5 End recording.
Press the movie-record button again
to end recording.
Recording will end
automatically when the maximum
length is reached, or the memory card
is full.
6 Exit live view.
Press the a button to exit live view.
A Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for
maximum recording times, see page 166); note that depending on
memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is
reached (0 379).
165
The Live View Display: Movies
Item Description 0
q
“No movie” icon Indicates that movies can not be recorded. —
w
Headphone volume
Volume of audio output to headphones.
Displayed when third-party headphones
are connected.
193
e
Microphone
sensitivity
Microphone sensitivity.
192,
273
r
Sound level
Sound level for audio recording.
Displayed
in red if level is too high; adjust
microphone sensitivity accordingly.
—
t
Frequency response The current frequency response.
192,
274
y
Wind noise
reduction
Displayed when wind noise reduction is
on.
192,
274
u
Time remaining
(movie live view)
The recording time available for movies. 163
i
Movie frame size The frame size for movie recording. 166
o
Highlight display
indicator
Appears when highlight display is enabled. 193
q
w
e
t
y
r
i
u
o
166
Maximum Length
The maximum length varies with the options selected for Movie
quality and Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting menu
(0 273) as shown below.
Movie quality Frame size/frame rate
*
Maximum length
Maximum bit rate
(Mbps)
High quality
v
1920 × 1080; 60p
10 min. 42
w
1920 × 1080; 50p
o
1920 × 1080; 30p
20 min. 24
p
1920 × 1080; 25p
q
1920 × 1080; 24p
r
1280 × 720; 60p
s
1280 × 720; 50p
Normal
y
1920 × 1080; 60p
z
1920 × 1080; 50p
1
1920 × 1080; 30p
29 min. 59 s 12
2
1920 × 1080; 25p
3
1920 × 1080; 24p
4
1280 × 720; 60p
5
1280 × 720; 50p
* Listed values. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and
23.976 fps respectively.
A Frame Size and Rate
Settings of 1920×1080; 60p and 1920×1080; 50p are not available
for Frame size/frame rate when DX (24×16) is selected for Image
area in the movie shooting menu (0 168).
These settings can be
accessed by setting Image area to 1.3× (18×12).
Choosing DX
(24×16) for Image area when either of these options is in effect resets
Frame size/frame rate to 1920×1080; 30p (if 1920×1080; 60p is
selected) or to 1920×1080; 25p (if 1920×1080; 50p is selected).
167
Indices
If Index marking is selected as the
“Press” option for Custom Setting g1
(Assign Fn button, 0 288), g2 (Assign
preview button, 0 288), or g3 (Assign
AE-L/AF-L button, 0 288), you can press
the selected button during recording to
add indices that can be used to locate
frames during editing and playback
(0 178; note that indices can not be
added in i mode).
Up to 20 indices can
be added to each movie.
A See Also
Frame size, frame rate, microphone sensitivity, card slot, and ISO
sensitivity options are available in the movie shooting menu (0 273).
The roles played by the J, Fn, Pv, and A AE-L/AF-L buttons can be chosen
using Custom Settings f1 (OK button; 0 284), g1 (Assign Fn button;
0 288), g2 (Assign preview button; 0 288), and g3 (Assign AE-L/
AF-L button, 0 288), respectively (the last three options also allow
you to lock exposure without having to keep a button pressed).
Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button; 0 288) controls whether
the shutter-release button can be used to start live view or to start and
end movie recording.
Pv button
Index
168
Image Area
Selecting 1.3× (18×12) for Image area in the movie shooting
menu (0 274) reduces the angle of view and increases the
apparent focal length of the lens.
Note that movies recorded at
the same frame size but with different image areas may not have
the same resolution.
DX (24×16) 1.3× (18×12)
169
Taking Photos in Movie Mode
If Take photos is selected for Custom Setting g4
(Assign shutter button, 0 288) and live view is
enabled with the live view selector is rotated to 1,
photographs can be taken at any time by pressing the
shutter-release button all the way down.
If movie recording is in
progress, recording will end and the footage recorded to that
point will be saved.
The photograph will be recorded at the
current image area setting using a crop with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9.
Image quality is determined by the option selected for
Image quality in the photo shooting menu (0 77, 268).
Note
that exposure for photographs can not be previewed while the
live view selector is rotated to 1; for accurate results when
shooting in mode M, rotate the selector to C, adjust exposure,
and then rotate the selector back to 1 and start live view.
Check
the image area before recording.
A Image Size
The following sizes are available:
Image area Image size Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.)
*
DX (24×16)
Large 6000 × 3368 50.8 × 28.5/20.0 × 11.2
Medium 4496 × 2528 38.1 × 21.4/15.0 × 8.4
Small 2992 × 1680 25.3 × 14.2/10.0 × 5.6
1.3× (18×12)
Large 4800 × 2696 40.6 × 22.8/16.0 × 9.0
Medium 3600 × 2024 30.5 × 17.1/12.0 × 6.7
Small 2400 × 1344 20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5
*Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
170
A HDMI
To use live view when the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device,
select Off for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 292).
A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter
button, 0 288) and the live view selector is rotated to 1, the shutter-
release buttons on optional wireless remote controllers (0 160, 319)
and remote cords (0 319) can be used to start live view and to start
and end movie recording.
D Recording Movies
Movies are recorded in the sRGB color space.
Flicker, banding, or
distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are
in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object
moves horizontally at high speed through frame (for information on
reducing flicker and banding, see Flicker reduction, 0 290).
Jagged
edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear.
Bright
regions or bands may appear in some areas of the frame with flashing
signs and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source.
Avoid
pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry.
Flash lighting can not be used.
Recording ends automatically if the mode dial is rotated.
171
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie at the frame size and rate
currently selected in the movie shooting menu (0 273).
For
information on the image area used for time-lapse movies, see
page 168.
1 Select Time-lapse photography.
Highlight Time-lapse photography
in the movie shooting menu and
press 2 to display time-lapse
photography settings.
Time-Lapse Photography
(i, j, P, S, A, M, and SCENE Modes Only)
A Before Shooting
Before beginning time-lapse photography, take a test shot at current
settings (framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure
preview) and view the results in the monitor.
For consistent coloration,
choose a white balance setting other than auto (0 111).
Once settings
have been adjusted to your satisfaction, remove the rubber eyecup
and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent
light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and
exposure (0 70).
Use of a tripod is recommended.
Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an
optional AC adapter and power connector or a fully-charged battery.
172
2 Adjust time-lapse photography settings.
Choose an interval, total shooting time, and exposure
smoothing option.
• To choose the interval between frames:
• To choose the total shooting time:
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval longer than
the slowest anticipated shutter
speed (minutes and seconds)
and press J.
Highlight Shooting time and
press 2.
Choose shooting time (up to
7 hours 59 minutes) and
press J.
173
• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in
modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only
takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on).
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
Time-
lapse photography starts after about
3 s.
The camera takes photographs at
the selected interval for the selected
shooting time.
When complete, time-
lapse movies are recorded to the
memory card selected for Destination in movie shooting
menu (0 273).
Highlight Exposure
smoothing and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
174
❚❚ Ending Time-Lapse Photography
To end time-lapse photography before all the photos are taken,
highlight Off in the time-lapse photography menu and press J,
or press J between frames or immediately after a frame is
recorded.
A movie will be created from the frames shot to the
point where time-lapse photography ended.
Note that time-
lapse photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the
power source is removed or disconnected or the destination
memory card is ejected.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current frame if it is unable to focus
using single-servo autofocus (AF-S or single-servo autofocus
selected for AF-A; note that the camera focuses again before each
shot).
Shooting will resume with the next frame.
D Time-Lapse Photography
Time-lapse is not available in live view (0 31, 161), at a shutter speed
of A or % (0 58), when bracketing (0 197), High Dynamic Range
(HDR, 0 141), multiple exposure (0 211), or interval timer
photography (0 217) is active. Note that because shutter speed and
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary
from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the
start of the next shot may vary.
Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse
movie can not be recorded at current settings (for example, if the
memory card is full, the interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval
is longer than the shooting time).
Time-lapse photography may end if camera controls are used or
settings are changed or HDMI cable is connected.
A movie will be
created from the frames shot to the point where time-lapse
photography ended.
175
A Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final
movie can be approximated by dividing the
shooting time by the interval and rounding
up.
The length of the final movie can then
be calculated by dividing the number of
shots by the frame rate selected for Frame
size/frame rate in movie shooting menu
(0 166, 273).
A 48 frame movie recorded at
1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be
about two seconds long.
The maximum
length for movies recorded using time-
lapse photography is 20 minutes.
A During Shooting
During time-lapse photography, the
memory card access lamp will light and the
time-lapse recording indicator will be
displayed in the control panel.
The time
remaining (in hours and minutes) appears in
the shutter-speed display immediately
before each frame is recorded.
At other times, the time remaining can
be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
Regardless
of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 279),
the standby timer will not expire during shooting.
To view current time-lapse photography
settings or end time-lapse photography,
press the G button between shots.
Frame size/
frame rate
Memory card
indicator
Length recorded/
maximum length
176
A Image Review
The K button can not be used to view pictures while time-lapse
photography is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for
a few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the
playback menu (0 267).
Other playback operations can not be
performed while the frame is displayed.
A Flash Photography
To use the flash during time-lapse photography, select mode P, S, A, or
M and press the M (Y) button to raise the flash before shooting begins.
A Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot
at each interval.
The self-timer can not be used.
A See Also
For information on setting a beep to sound when time-lapse
photography is complete, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0 280).
177
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 229).
Press J to start playback; your current position is indicated by
the movie progress bar.
The following operations can be performed:
Viewing Movies
1 icon Length Current position/total length
Movie
progress bar
Volume Guide
To Use Description
Pause Pause playback.
Play J
Resume playback when movie is
paused or during rewind/advance.
Rewind/
advance
Speed
increases with
each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×;
keep pressed to skip to beginning or
end of movie (first frame is indicated by
h in top right corner of monitor, last
frame by i).
If playback is paused,
movie rewinds or advances one frame
at a time; keep pressed for continuous
rewind or advance.
178
Skip 10 s
Rotate the main command dial one stop
to skip ahead or back 10 s.
Skip ahead/
back
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to
next or previous index, or to skip to the
last or first frame if the movie contains
no indices.
Adjust volume
X
(T)/
W (S)
Press
X
(T) to increase volume,
W (S) to decrease.
Trim movie
i
See page 179 for more information.
Exit
K /
Exit to full-frame playback.
Return to
shooting
mode
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to exit to shooting mode.
A The p Icon
Movies with indices (0 167) are indicated by
a p icon in full-frame playback.
To Use Description
179
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1 Display a movie full frame (0 229).
2 Pause the movie on the new opening
frame.
Play the movie back as described on
page 177, pressing J to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause and
pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the main
or sub-command dial to locate the
desired frame.
Your approximate
position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie
progress bar.
Pause playback when you reach the new
opening frame.
Editing Movies
Option Description
9
Choose start/end point
Create a copy from which unwanted footage
has been removed.
4
Save selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Movie progress bar
180
3 Select Choose start/end point.
Press the i button.
Highlight Choose start/end point.
4 Select Start point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J.
The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
i button
Start point
181
5 Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the main command dial one
stop; to skip to an index, or to the first
or last frame if the movie contains no
indices, rotate the sub-command dial).
6 Choose the end point.
Press L (U) to switch from the start
point (w) to the end point (x) selection
tool and then select the closing frame
as described in Step 5. The frames
after the selected frame will be
removed when you save the copy in
Step 9.
7 Create the copy.
Once the desired closing frame is displayed, press 1.
L (U) button
End point
182
8 Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1).
To abandon
the current copy and select a new
start point or end point as described
on the foregoing pages, highlight Cancel and press J; to
save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
9 Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file.
To
replace the original movie file with the
edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
A Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long.
The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A Removing Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to Step
7 without pressing the L (U) button in Step 6. To remove only the
closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the closing frame,
and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the L (U) button in Step 6.
A The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option in the retouch
menu (0 296).
183
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described on
page 177, pressing J to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause the movie at the frame you
intend to copy.
2 Choose Save selected frame.
Press the i button, then highlight
Save selected frame and press J.
3 Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of the
current frame.
i button
185
Other Shooting Options
Pressing the R button during viewfinder
photography displays shooting
information in the monitor including
shutter speed, aperture, number of
exposures remaining, and AF-area mode.
The R Button (Viewfinder Photography)
R button
2 34561
7
8
9
1 Shooting mode ................................6
2 Flexible program indicator......... 52
3 Flash sync indicator....................282
4 Shutter speed ..........................53, 56
5 Aperture stop indicator...... 54, 308
6 Aperture (f-number) ..............54, 56
Aperture (number of
stops)..................................... 54, 308
7 Exposure indicator ....................... 57
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 109
Bracketing progress indicator
Exposure and flash
bracketing........................... 198
WB bracketing....................... 203
8 Active D-Lighting indicator...... 140
9 Picture Control indicator........... 131
186
The Information Display (Continued)
11
12
13
141516171819
22
23
24
25
21
20
10
10 White balance..............................112
White balance fine-tuning
indicator.......................................115
11 HDR indicator............................... 142
HDR strength ...............................142
Multiple exposure indicator..... 214
12 “Beep” indicator .......................... 280
13 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 27
14 Image comment indicator........291
15 Copyright information...............291
16 “Clock not set” indicator ...........188
17 Image quality ................................ 78
Role played by card in slot 2...... 82
18 Image size....................................... 81
19 Autofocus mode ........................... 83
20 Pv button assignment ...............285
21 Release mode ............................ 8, 66
Continuous shooting speed....... 67
22 Image area indicator.................... 74
23 Metering ....................................... 105
24 Exposure and flash bracketing
indicator ...................................... 198
WB bracketing indicator ........... 203
ADL bracketing indicator.......... 207
25 ADL bracketing amount............ 208
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button
again or press the shutter-release button halfway.
The monitor will
turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about
10 seconds.
187
The Information Display (Continued)
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
30 3129282726 32 33 34
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
39
35
26 Wi-Fi connection indicator....... 252
Eye-Fi connection indicator..... 293
27 Satellite signal indicator ........... 228
28 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator ...................................... 271
29 Vignette control indicator ........ 271
30 Auto distortion control ............. 271
31 Exposure delay mode................ 280
32 Interval timer indicator ............. 217
Time-lapse indicator.................. 171
Remote control mode
(ML-L3)......................................... 156
33 MB-D15 battery type display... 281
MB-D15 battery indicator......... 319
34 Camera battery indicator......22, 26
35 ISO sensitivity indicator ............ 100
ISO sensitivity .............................. 100
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator ...................................... 103
36 Number of exposures
remaining ......................................27
Time-lapse recording
indicator ...................................... 175
37 Fn button assignment ............... 284
38 AE-L/AF-L button assignment ... 285
39 AF-area mode indicator...............86
40 Flash mode ......................... 144, 146
41 FV lock indicator......................... 154
42 Flash compensation
indicator ...................................... 151
Flash compensation value ....... 151
43 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 110
Exposure compensation
value............................................. 109
188
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 279).
For information on
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see
Custom Setting d9 (Information display, 0 281).
A The Y (“Clock Not Set”) Icon
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed or the camera is powered by an optional power connector
and AC adapter (0 319).
Two days of charging will power the clock for
about three months.
If a Y icon flashes in the information display, the
clock has been reset and the date and time recorded with new
photographs will not be correct.
Use the Time zone and date > Date
and time option in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time
and date (0 290).
189
For quick access to frequently-used
settings, press the i button.
Highlight
items and press 2 to view options, then
highlight the desired option and press J
to select.
To exit the i-button menu and
return to the shooting display, press the
i button.
The i Button
Viewfinder
photography Live view
i-button menu i-button menu
(live view selector
rotated to C)
i-button menu
(live view selector
rotated to 1)
i button
190
The i-Button Menu (Viewfinder Photography)
Pressing the i button during viewfinder photography displays a
menu with the following options:
Option Description
Image area
Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12)
image areas (0 73).
Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control (0 130).
Active D-Lighting Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 139).
HDR (high dynamic
range)
The camera combines two photographs taken at
different exposures to enhance details in highlights
and shadows (0 141).
Remote control
mode (ML-L3)
Choose a remote control mode (0 156).
Assign Fn button
Choose the role played by the Fn button (0 284),
either by itself (Press) or when used in combination
with the command dials (Press + command dials).
Assign preview
button
Choose the role played by the Pv button (0 285),
either by itself (Press) or when used in combination
with the command dials (Press + command dials).
Assign AE-L/AF-L
button
Choose the role played by the A AE-L/ AF-L button
(0 285), either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials (Press +
command dials).
Long exposure NR
Reduces noise (bright spots or fog) at slow shutter
speeds (0 271).
High ISO NR
Reduces noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels) that
tends to occur as ISO sensitivity increases (0 271).
191
The i-Button Menu (Live View)
The options available in the live view i-button menu vary with
the position of the live view selector.
If the live view selector is rotated to C, the i-button menu will
contain the items listed below.
Option Description
Image area
Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12)
image areas (0 73).
Image quality Choose image quality (0 77).
Image size Choose image size (0 81).
Set Picture Control Choose a Picture Control (0 130).
Active D-Lighting Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 139).
Remote control
mode (ML-L3)
Choose a remote control mode (0 156).
Monitor
brightness
Press 1 or 3 to adjust
monitor brightness for live
view (note that this affects
live view only and has no
effect on photographs or
movies or on the brightness
of the monitor for menus or
playback; to adjust the brightness of the monitor for
menus and playback without affecting live view, use
the Monitor brightness option in the setup menu
(0 289)).
192
If the live view selector is rotated to 1, the i-button menu will contain
the items listed below.
Microphone sensitivity, Frequency
response, Wind noise reduction, and Highlight display can be
adjusted while recording is in progress.
Option Description
Image area
Choose from the DX (24×16) and 1.3× (18×12)
image areas (0 168).
Frame size/
frame rate
Select a frame size and rate (0 166).
Movie quality Choose movie quality (0 166).
Microphone
sensitivity
Press 1 or 3 to adjust
microphone sensitivity.
Both the built-in and
optional stereo
microphones are affected.
Frequency
response
Control the frequency response of the built-in
microphone or optional stereo microphones (0 274).
Wind noise
reduction
Enable or disable wind noise reduction using the
built-in microphone’s low-cut filter (0 274).
Set Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control (0 130).
The Clarity
parameter does not apply to movies.
Destination
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose
the card to which movies are recorded (0 273).
Monitor
brightness
Press 1 or 3 to adjust
monitor brightness for live
view (note that this affects
live view only and has no
effect on photographs or
movies or on the brightness
of the monitor for menus or
playback; 0 191).
193
Highlight display
Choose whether the
brightest areas of the frame
(highlights) are shown by
slanting lines in the live
view display.
To access this
option, select mode P, S, A,
or M.
Headphone
volume
Press 1 or 3 to adjust
headphone volume.
A Using an External Microphone
The optional stereo microphone can be used to record sound in stereo
or to avoid recording focus noise and other sounds made by the lens
(0 319).
A Headphones
Third-party headphones can be used.
Note that high sound levels may
result in high volume; particular care should be taken when
headphones are used.
Option Description
Highlights
194
The camera settings listed
below can be restored to
default values by holding the
W (S) and E buttons down
together for more than two
seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot).
The
control panel turns off briefly
while settings are reset.
❚❚ Menu Options
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default
Settings
Option Default 0
Image quality JPEG normal 77
Image size Large 81
White balance Auto > Normal 111
Fine tuning A-B: 0, G-M: 0 114
Picture Control settings
1
Unmodified 130
HDR (high dynamic range) Off
2
141
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M 100
99
Other modes Auto
Hi ISO command dial access Off 101
Auto ISO sensitivity control Off 102
Remote control mode (ML-L3) Off 156
Multiple exposure Off
3
211
Interval timer shooting Off
4
217
Exposure delay mode Off 280
E button
W (S) button
195
1 Current Picture Control only.
2 HDR strength is not reset.
3 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple exposure will be
created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and number of shots are not reset.
4 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end.
Starting time, shooting
interval, number of intervals and shots, and exposure smoothing are not reset.
❚❚ Other Settings
Option Default 0
Autofocus (viewfinder)
Autofocus mode
% AF-S
83
Other modes AF-A
AF-area mode
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3 Single-point AF
86
m, w 51-point dynamic-area AF
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z,
g, u, P, S, A, M
Auto-area AF
Autofocus (live view)
Autofocus mode AF-S 84
AF-area mode
m, r, w, %, g, u, 1, 2, 3, P, S, A, M Wide-area AF
88n, 0 Normal-area AF
i, j, k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, z Face-prio
rity AF
Focus point
1
Center 89
Highlight display Off 193
Headphone volume 15 193
Metering Matrix 105
AE lock hold Off 93, 107
Bracketing Off
2
197
196
Flash compensation Off 151
Exposure compensation Off 109
Flash mode
i, k, p, n, w, g Auto
145,
147
s Auto+red-eye reduction
o Auto+slow sync
0, P, S, A, M Fill flash
FV lock Off 153
Flexible program Off 52
+ NEF (RAW) Off 79
1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1 EV (exposure/flash
bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing).
Y Auto is selected for the second shot of
two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
Option Default 0
197
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value.
Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported,
auto aperture flash control modes only; see pages 149, 283, and
313), white balance, or Active D-Lighting and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs.
1 Select flash or exposure bracketing.
Select Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set) in the Custom
Settings menu, highlight an option,
and press J.
Choose AE & flash to
vary both exposure and flash level, AE
only to vary only exposure, or Flash
only to vary only flash level.
Bracketing (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
Exposure modified by:
0EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
198
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than zero, a M icon
is displayed in the control panel.
D appears in the viewfinder, while
the information display provides a bracketing indicator and
an icon showing the type of bracketing: v (exposure and
flash bracketing), w (exposure bracketing only), or x
(flash bracketing only).
Number of
shots
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
BKT button Main command
dial
Information display
A Live View
In live view, bracketing settings are displayed in the monitor.
Viewfinder
199
3 Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 0.3 (
1
/
3), 0.7 (
2
/
3), 1, 2, and 3 EV.
The bracketing programs
with an increment of 0.3 (
1
/
3) EV are listed below.
Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the
maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected
in Step 2, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
Exposure increment
BKT button Sub-command
dial
Information display
Information display
No. of
shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
00
30/+0.3/+0.7
30/–0.7/–0.3
20/+0.3
20/–0.3
30/–0.3/+0.3
5 0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
7 0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7/+1.0
9
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7/
+1.0/+1.3
200
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level
shot-by-shot according to the bracketing program
selected.
Modifications to exposure are added to
those made with exposure compensation (see page 109).
A bracketing progress indicator is displayed while bracketing
is in effect.
A segment will disappear from the indicator after
each shot.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7 Display after first shot
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increment, see Custom
Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl, 0 278).
For information on
choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see Custom
Setting e7 (Bracketing order, 0 284).
201
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until no shots remain in the bracketing sequence.
The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by
performing a two-button reset (0 194), although in this case the
bracketing program will not be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
A Zero Shots
The live view display shows “–/–” when no shots remain in the
bracketing sequence.
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous release modes (0 66), shooting will pause after the
number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
In self-timer mode, the camera will take the number of shots
selected in Step 2 on page 198 each time the shutter-release button is
pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-
timer) > Number of shots (0 279); the interval between shots is
however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval
between shots.
In other modes, one shot will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card.
If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
202
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each
with a different white balance.
For more information on white
balance, see page 111.
1 Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set).
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M).
If On is
selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control
(0 102) in modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO
sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use
auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to
the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.
203
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than zero, M and
D are displayed respectively in the
control panel and viewfinder; a
y icon and a bracketing indicator appear in the
information display.
Number of
shots
WB bracketing
indicator
BKT button Main command
dial
Information display
A Live View
In live view, bracketing settings are displayed in the monitor.
Viewfinder
204
3 Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose from increments of 1, 2, or 3 (respectively equivalent
to approximately 5, 10, or 15 mired).
The B value indicates the
amount of blue, the A value the amount of amber (0 114).
The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed
below.
White balance increment
BKT button Sub-command
dial
Information display
Information display
No. of
shots
White balance
increment
Bracketing order
21B 0/1B
21A 0/1A
3 1A, 1B 0/1A/1B
205
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create
the number of copies specified in the
bracketing program, and each copy will have a different
white balance.
Modifications to white balance are added to
the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-
tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures
remaining, n and the icon for
the affected card will flash in the
control panel, a flashing j icon
will appear in the viewfinder as
shown at right, and the shutter
release will be disabled.
Shooting
can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
206
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until no shots remain in the bracketing sequence.
The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by
performing a two-button reset (0 194), although in this case the
bracketing program will not be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
A Zero Shots
The live view display shows “–/–” when no shots remain in the
bracketing sequence.
A White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW).
Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF
(RAW) + JPEG normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic cancels white
balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 114).
No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode (0 69), the number of copies specified in the white-
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released,
regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) >
Number of shots (0 279).
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
207
❚❚ ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
For more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 139.
1 Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 (Auto bracketing set).
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
At settings other than zero, M and
D are displayed respectively in the
control panel and viewfinder; a
z icon and the bracketing amount appear in the
information display.
ADL bracketing
amount
Number of
shots
BKT button Main command
dial
Information display
Viewfinder
208
Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active
D-Lighting off and another at a selected value.
Choose three
to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active
D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and Normal (three shots), Off,
Low, Normal, and High (four shots), or Off, Low, Normal,
High, and Extra high (five shots).
If you choose more than
two shots, proceed to Step 4.
3 Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the BKT button,
rotate the sub-command
dial to choose Active
D-Lighting.
Active D-Lighting is shown in the information display and
control panel.
Active D-Lighting Information display Control panel display
Y
Auto
R
Low
Q
Normal
P
High
Z
Extra high
BKT button Sub-command
dial
209
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-
shot according to the bracketing program
selected.
A bracketing progress indicator is
displayed while bracketing is in effect.
A segment will
disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3 Display after first shot
A Live View
In live view, bracketing settings are displayed in the monitor.
210
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until no shots remain in the bracketing sequence.
The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by
performing a two-button reset (0 194), although in this case the
bracketing program will not be restored the next time
bracketing is activated.
A Zero Shots
The live view display shows “–/–” when no shots remain in the
bracketing sequence.
A ADL Bracketing
In continuous release modes (0 66), shooting will pause after the
number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken.
Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
In self-timer mode, the camera will take the number of shots
selected in Step 2 on page 207 each time the shutter-release button is
pressed, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-
timer) > Number of shots (0 279); the interval between shots is
however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval
between shots.
In other modes, one shot will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card.
If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
211
Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three NEF
(RAW) exposures in a single photograph.
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view.
Exit live
view before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting
will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically
if no operations are performed for about 30 s.
1 Select Multiple exposure.
Highlight Multiple exposure in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
Multiple Exposure (P, S, A, and M Modes Only)
A Extended Recording Times
If the monitor turns off during playback or menu operations and no
operations are performed for about 30 s, shooting will end and a
multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been
recorded to that point.
The time available to record the next exposure
can be extended by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer, 0 279).
212
2 Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure mode
and press 2.
Highlight one of the following and
press J.
• To take a series of multiple exposures,
select 6 On (series).
Multiple
exposure shooting will continue
until you select Off for Multiple
exposure mode.
• To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo).
Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single multiple exposure.
• To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in
the control panel.
213
3 Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press
2.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of
exposures that will be combined to
form a single photograph and press
J.
4 Choose the amount of gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.
The following options will be
displayed.
Highlight an option and
press J.
• On: Gain is adjusted according to
number of exposures actually
recorded (gain for each exposure is
set to
1
/
2 for 2 exposures,
1
/
3 for 3
exposures).
• Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
214
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous release modes (0 66), the camera
records all exposures in a single burst.
If On
(series) is selected, the camera will continue to
record multiple exposures while the shutter-release button is
pressed; if On (single photo) is selected, multiple exposure
shooting will end after the first photograph.
In self-timer
mode, the camera will automatically record the number of
exposures selected in Step 3 on page 213, regardless of the
option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number
of shots (0 279); the interval between shots is however
controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval
between shots.
In other release modes, one photograph will
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed;
continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for
information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all
photographs are recorded, see page 215).
The n icon will flash until shooting
ends.
If On (series) is selected,
multiple exposure shooting will only
end when Off is selected for multiple
exposure mode; if On (single photo)
is selected, multiple exposure
shooting ends automatically when the multiple exposure is
complete.
The n icon clears from the display when multiple
exposure shooting ends.
215
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of
exposures have been taken, select Off for multiple exposure
mode.
If shooting ends before the specified number of
exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created
from the exposures that have been recorded to that point.
If
Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of
exposures actually recorded.
Note that shooting will end
automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (0 194)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
216
D Multiple Exposures
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Live view is not available while shooting is in progress. Selecting live
view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.
The shooting information listed in the playback photo information
display (including metering, exposure, shooting mode, focal length,
date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot in the
multiple exposure.
A Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until
the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu
have been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer
shooting menu is ignored).
These exposures will then be recorded as a
single photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single
photo) is selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure
shooting will also end automatically).
A Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be
changed.
217
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
1 Select Interval timer shooting.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in
the photo shooting menu and
press 2 to display interval timer
settings.
Interval Timer Photography
D Before Shooting
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) and M
UP when using the
interval timer.
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a
test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor.
Once
settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction, remove the rubber
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to
prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs
and exposure (0 70).
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the
setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct
time and date (0 290).
Use of a tripod is recommended.
Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure
the camera battery is fully charged.
If in doubt, charge the battery
before use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available
separately).
218
2 Adjust interval timer settings.
Choose a start option, interval, number of shots per interval,
and exposure smoothing option.
• To choose a start option:
To start shooting immediately, select Now.
To start
shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose start
day and start time, then choose the date and time and
press J.
• To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight Start options and
press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval (hours,
minutes, and seconds) and
press J.
219
• To choose the number of shots per interval:
In S (single frame) mode, the photographs for each interval
will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2
(Continuous low-speed, 0 280).
• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on).
Highlight No. of intervals ×
shots/interval and press 2.
Choose the number of intervals
and the number of shots per
interval and press J.
Highlight Exposure
smoothing and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
220
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
The first
series of shots will be taken at the
specified starting time, or after about
3s if Now was selected for Start
options in Step 2.
Shooting will
continue at the selected interval until
all shots have been taken.
A During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the
memory card access lamp will flash.
Immediately before the next shooting
interval begins, the shutter speed display
will show the number of intervals remaining,
and the aperture display will show the
number of shots remaining in the current
interval.
At other times, the number of
intervals remaining and the number of shots
in each interval can be viewed by pressing
the shutter-release button halfway (once the button is released, the
shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the standby timer
expires).
Settings can be adjusted, the menus used, and pictures played back
while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor will turn
off automatically about four seconds before each interval.
Note that
changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause
shooting to end.
A Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval.
Memory card
access lamp
221
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J or selecting Pause in the interval timer menu.
❚❚ Resuming Interval Timer Shooting
To resume shooting:
Starting Now
Starting at a Specified Time
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting
To end interval timer photography before all the photos are
taken, select Off in the interval timer menu.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
For Start options,
highlight Choose start
day and start time
and press 2.
Choose a starting date
and time and press J.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
222
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory card is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S or when single-servo AF is
selected in AF-A (note that the camera focuses again before each
shot).
Shooting will resume with the next interval.
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken.
Resume shooting (0 221) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
A Interval Timer Photography
Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots.
If the interval is too short, the number of photos
taken may be less than the total listed in Step 2 (the number of
intervals multiplied by the number of shots per interval).
Interval timer
photography can not be combined with long time-exposures (bulb or
time photography, 0 58) or time-lapse photography (0 171) and is
not available in live view (0 31, 161) or when Record movies is
selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter button, 0 288).
Note
that because the shutter speed, frame rate, and time needed to record
images may vary from one interval to the next, the time between the
end of one interval and the beginning of the next may vary.
If shooting
can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of
A or % is currently selected in manual exposure mode, the
interval is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will
be displayed in the monitor.
Interval timer shooting will pause when E (self-timer) or M
UP mode is
selected or if the camera is turned off and then on again (when the
camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without
ending interval timer photography).
Pausing shooting does not affect
interval timer settings.
223
A Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in
the bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of
shots specified in the interval timer menu.
If white balance bracketing
is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will
take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of
copies specified in the bracketing program.
224
Non-CPU lenses can be used in modes A and M, with aperture set
using the lens aperture ring.
By specifying lens data (lens focal
length and maximum aperture), the user can gain access to the
following CPU lens functions.
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with optional flash units
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback
photo info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit
supports AA (auto aperture) mode
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate
results with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
Non-CPU Lenses
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens.
Note that lens data are not
adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.
The data for
different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the
data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal
length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.
225
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses.
To
enter or edit data for a non-CPU lens:
1 Select Non-CPU lens data.
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the
setup menu and press 2.
2 Choose a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and press 4
or 2 to choose a lens number.
3 Enter the focal length and aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm) or
Maximum aperture and press 4 or
2 to edit the highlighted item.
4 Save settings and exit.
Press J.
The specified focal length and aperture will be
stored under the chosen lens number.
A Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.
226
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “Press +
command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom
Settings menu.
Non-CPU lens number selection can be
assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f2, Assign Fn
button, 0 284), the Pv button (Custom Setting f3, Assign
preview button, 0 285), or the A AE-L/AF-L button (Custom
Setting f4, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0 285).
2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number.
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired lens number is displayed in the control
panel.
Focal length
Maximum
aperture
Lens number
Fn button Main command
dial
Control panel
227
The GP-1/GP-1A GPS unit (available separately) can be
connected to the camera’s accessory terminal (0 2) using the
cable supplied with the GP-1/GP-1A, allowing information on
the camera’s current position to be recorded when photographs
are taken.
Turn the camera off before connecting the GP-1/
GP-1A; for more information, see the GP-1/GP-1A manual.
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The Location data item in the setup menu contains the options
listed below.
• Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off
automatically when the GP-1/GP-1A is attached.
• Position: This item is only available if the GP-1/GP-1A is
connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude,
altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by
the GP-1/GP-1A.
• Set clock from satellite: Select Ye s to synchronize the camera clock
with the time reported by the GPS device.
Location Data
Option Description
Enable
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2
(Standby timer, 0 279; to allow the camera time to
acquire location data, the delay is extended by up to one
minute after the exposure meters are activated or the
camera is turned on).
This reduces the drain on the battery.
Disable
Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP-1/GP-1A is
connected.
228
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the
camera clock.
A The o Icon
Connection status is shown by the o icon:
• o (static): The camera has established communication with GP-1/
GP-1A.
Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is
displayed includes an additional page of location data (0 241).
• o (flashing): The GP-1/GP-1A is searching for a signal.
Pictures taken
while the icon is flashing do not include location data.
• No icon: No new location data have been received from the GP-1/
GP-1A for at least two seconds.
Pictures taken when the o icon is not
displayed do not include location data.
Information display Shooting display
229
More on Playback
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K
button.
The most recent photograph will
be displayed in the monitor.
Viewing Pictures
To Use Description
View additional
photographs
Press 2 to view photographs in order
recorded, 4 to view photographs in
reverse order.
View photo
information
Press 1 or 3 to view information
about current photograph (0 234).
Return to
shooting mode
K
/
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to exit
to shooting mode.
Play movie
J
If current picture is marked with 1
icon to show that it is a movie,
pressing J starts movie playback
(0 177).
K button
230
A Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu
(0 267).
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 267),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are
not rotated automatically during image review).
In continuous release
modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph
in the current series displayed.
231
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four, nine, or 72 images,
press the W (S) button.
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Highlight images
Use multi selector to highlight
images for full-frame playback,
playback zoom (0 243), deletion
(0 246), or protection (0 245).
View highlighted
image
J
Press J to display the highlighted
image full frame.
Return to shooting
mode
K
/
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
W (S)
X (T)
W (S)
X (T)
232
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (S)
button when 72 images are displayed.
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the
cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list:
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Toggle between
date list and
thumbnail list
W (S)/J
Press W (S) or J button in
date list to place cursor in
thumbnail list.
Press W (S)
again to return to date list.
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom in
on highlighted
photo
X (T)
• Date list: Exit to 72-frame
playback.
• Thumbnail list: Press and hold
X (T) button to zoom in on
highlighted picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
• Date list: Highlight date.
• Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
playback
J
Thumbnail list: View highlighted
picture.
Return to shooting
mode
K
/
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway
to exit to shooting mode.
W (S)
X (T)
W (S)
X (T)
Thumbnail list
Date list
233
The i Button
Pressing the i button during full-frame
or thumbnail playback displays the
options listed below.
• Playback slot and folder: Choose a folder for
playback. Highlight a slot and press 2
to list the folders on the selected card,
then highlight a folder and press J to
view the pictures in the highlighted
folder.
• Retouch (photographs only): Use the
options in the retouch menu (0 294) to
create a retouched copy of the current
photograph.
• Edit movie (movies only): Edit movies using
the options in the edit movie menu (0 179).
Movies can also
be edited by pressing the i button when movie playback is
paused.
• Select to send to smart device/deselect: Select photos for upload to a
smart device (0 263).
To exit the i-button menu and return to playback, press the
i button again.
i button
234
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback.
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
Note that “image only”, shooting
data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback
display options (0 266).
Location data are only displayed if a
GP-1/GP-1A was used when the photo was taken (0 227).
Photo Information
File information None (image only) Overview data
Highlights Location data
RGB histogram Shooting data
235
❚❚ File Information
1Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options (0 266)
and selected photograph was taken using viewfinder.
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S or with single-servo autofocus selected during AF-A,
display shows point where focus first locked.
If photograph was taken using AF-C or with
continuous-servo autofocus selected during AF-A, focus point is only displayed if option other
than auto-area AF was selected for AF-area mode.
1 34 5 6
7
1011
12
13
14
98
2
1 Protect status...............................245
2 Retouch indicator .......................294
3 Upload marking ..........................263
4 Focus point
1, 2
................................ 89
5 AF area brackets
1
.......................... 33
6 Frame number/total number of
frames
7 Image quality................................. 77
8 Image size....................................... 81
9 Image area ..................................... 73
10 Time of recording ................ 24, 290
11 Date of recording................. 24, 290
12 Current card slot ........................... 82
13 Folder name................................. 268
14 File name ...................................... 268
236
❚❚ Highlights
12
3
1 Image highlights
*
2 Folder number—frame
number ........................................ 268
3 Current channel
*
*Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for the current channel.
Hold W (S)
button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as
follows:
W (S) button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
237
❚❚ RGB Histogram
1
2
5
6
7
8
4
3
1 Image highlights
*
2 Folder number—frame
number ........................................268
3 White balance..............................111
Color temperature................117
White balance
fine-tuning..........................114
Preset manual........................120
4 Current channel
*
5 Histogram (RGB channel).
In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives
pixel brightness, vertical axis
number of pixels.
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green channel)
8 Histogram (blue channel)
*Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for the current channel.
Hold W (S)
button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels as
follows:
W (S) button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
Highlight display off
238
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X (T).
Use
the X (T) and W (S) buttons to zoom
in and out and scroll the image with the
multi selector.
The histogram will be
updated to show only the data for the
portion of the image visible in the monitor.
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications.
Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects
with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left.
Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
239
❚❚ Shooting Data
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 Metering .......................................105
Shutter speed ..........................53, 56
Aperture....................................54, 56
2 Shooting mode ................................6
ISO sensitivity
1
.............................. 99
3 Exposure compensation ...........109
Optimal exposure tuning
2
.......278
4 Focal length.........................224, 310
5 Lens data.......................................224
6 Focus mode..............................83, 97
Lens VR (vibration reduction)
3
7 Flash type ............................ 144, 311
Commander mode..................... 283
8 Flash mode.......................... 145, 147
9 Flash control .............. 149, 283, 313
Flash compensation................... 151
10 Camera name
11 Image area ..................................... 73
12 Folder number—frame
number ........................................ 268
15
14
13
13 White balance..............................111
Color temperature................117
White balance fine-tuning
....114
Preset manual........................120
14 Color space................................... 270
15 Picture Control
4
.......................... 130
240
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b5 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 278) has been set
to a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
4 Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected.
5 The fourth page of the shooting data is only displayed if copyright information was recorded
with the photograph using the Copyright information option in the setup menu.
20
19
18
21
17
16
16 High ISO noise reduction.......... 271
Long exposure noise
reduction..................................... 271
17 Active D-Lighting ....................... 139
18 HDR strength............................... 141
19 Vignette control.......................... 271
20 Retouch history........................... 294
21 Image comment ......................... 291
22
23
22 Name of photographer
5
........... 291 23 Copyright holder
5
...................... 291
242
❚❚ Overview Data
* Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
15
8
9
15 141312 11
16
23
28
29
17 18 19 20 21 22
26 25 24
7
32 4
6
10
27
1 Frame number/total number of
images
2 Upload marking.......................... 263
3 Protect status............................... 245
4 Retouch indicator....................... 294
5 Camera name
6 Image comment indicator ....... 291
7 Location data indicator............. 227
8 Histogram showing the
distribution of tones in the image
(0 238).
9 Image quality .................................77
10 Image size........................................81
11 Image area ......................................73
12 File name...................................... 268
13 Time of recording .................24, 290
14 Folder name................................. 268
15 Date of recording..................24, 290
16 Current card slot ............................82
17 Metering....................................... 105
18 Shooting mode................................ 6
19 Shutter speed.......................... 53, 56
20 Aperture ................................... 54, 56
21 ISO sensitivity
*
...............................99
22 Focal length ........................ 224, 310
23 Active D-Lighting ....................... 139
24 Picture Control ............................ 130
25 Color space .................................. 270
26 Flash mode ......................... 145, 147
27 White balance ............................. 111
Color temperature ............... 117
White balance fine-tuning
... 114
Preset manual....................... 120
28 Flash compensation .................. 151
Commander mode..................... 283
29 Exposure compensation........... 109
243
Press the X (T) button to zoom in on
the image displayed in full-frame
playback.
The following operations can
be performed while zoom is in effect:
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To Use Description
Zoom in or
out
X (T)/
W (S)
Press X (T) to
zoom in to
maximum of
approximately
38× (large images
in 24 × 16/DX
format), 28×
(medium images) or 19× (small images).
Press W (S) to zoom out.
While photo is
zoomed in, use multi selector to view areas
of image not visible in monitor.
Keep multi
selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other
areas of frame.
Navigation window is
displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area
currently visible in monitor is indicated by
yellow border.
Bar under navigation
window shows zoom ratio; turns green at
ratio of 1 : 1.
View other
areas of
image
X (T) button
244
Select faces
Faces detected
during zoom are
indicated by
white borders in
navigation
window.
Rotate
sub-command
dial to view other faces.
View other
images
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other photos at current zoom
ratio.
Playback zoom is cancelled when a
movie is displayed.
Return to
shooting
mode
K
/
Press the K button or press the shutter-
release button halfway to exit to shooting
mode.
To Use Description
245
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, press the
L (U) button to protect the current picture from accidental
deletion.
Protected files are marked with a P icon and can not
be deleted using the O (Q) button or the Delete option in the
playback menu.
Note that protected images will be deleted
when the memory card is formatted (0 289). To remove
protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or
highlight it and press the L (U) button.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
L (U) button
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (U) and O (Q)
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
246
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O (Q) button.
To
delete multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on
a selected date, or all photographs in the current playback
folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu.
Once
deleted, photographs can not be recovered.
Note that pictures
that are protected or hidden can not be deleted.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1 Press the O (Q) button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
2 Press the O (Q) button again.
To delete the photograph, press the
O (Q) button.
To exit without
deleting the photograph, press the K
button.
Deleting Photographs
O (Q) button
O (Q) button
247
A Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the
O (Q) button (0 232).
A See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether
the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is
deleted (0 267).
248
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options.
Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture and press the W (S) button
to select or deselect. Selected pictures
are marked by a O icon. Repeat as
desired to select additional pictures.
Option Description
Q
Selected Delete selected pictures.
n
Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date (0 249).
R
All
Delete all pictures in the
folder currently selected
for playback (0 266).
If
two cards are inserted, you
can select the card from
which pictures will be
deleted.
W (S) button
249
2 Delete the selected pictures.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Ye s and press J.
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1 Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select
all pictures taken on the highlighted
date.
Selected dates are marked with
a M icon.
Repeat as desired to select
additional dates; to deselect a date,
highlight it and press 2.
2 Delete the selected pictures.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Ye s and press J.
250
Wi-Fi
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi wireless networks to a
compatible smart device (smartphone or tablet) running Nikon’s
dedicated Wireless Mobile Utility app (0 263).
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Download pictures
Remote control
A Installing the Wireless Mobile Utility App
1 Find the app.
On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App
Store, or another app marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile
Utility”.
For more information, see the instructions provided with
the smart device.
2 Install the app.
Read the app description and install the app.
A pdf manual for the
Wireless Mobile Utility is available for download at the following
URLs:
• Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/
• iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/
Android iOS
251
Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless
Mobile Utility on your compatible Android or iOS smart device.
Android and iOS: Connecting via SSID
Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device before connecting.
For details,
see the documentation provided with the smart device.
1 Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2.
Highlight Network
connection and press 2, then
highlight Enable and press J.
Wait a
few seconds for Wi-Fi to activate.
2 Display the camera SSID.
Highlight Network settings and
press 2.
Accessing the Camera
252
Highlight View SSID and press 2.
3 Select the camera SSID.
On the smart device, choose Settings > Wi-Fi and select the
camera SSID to connect via Wi-Fi.
4 Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device.
5 Enable wireless security.
The connection will initially be unprotected by passwords or
other security features.
Enable security using the Wireless
Mobile Utility on the smart device (0 257).
A The Wi-Fi Display
While Wi-Fi is enabled, a g icon will flash in the display.
The icon will
stop flashing once a connection has been established and the camera
is exchanging data with the smart device.
Control panel Monitor
253
D Security
Although one of the benefits of a wireless-enabled device is that it
allows others to freely connect for the wireless exchange of data
anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not
enabled:
• Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless
transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal
information.
• Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the
network and alter data or perform other malicious actions.
Note that
due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow
unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
A Password Protection
You may be prompted to enter a password the first time you connect
after changing password settings.
254
Android: Connecting via NFC
If the smart device supports NFC (Near Field Communication), a
Wi-Fi connection can be established simply by touching the
camera N (N-Mark) logo to the smart device NFC antenna.
Before connecting, enable NFC and Wi-Fi on the smart device as
described in the documentation provided with the smart device.
1 Establish a Wi-Fi connection.
In viewfinder photography with the standby timer on, touch
the camera N (N-Mark) logo to the smart device NFC antenna
(for the location of the NFC antenna, see the documentation
provided with the smart device).
Maintain contact until the
camera displays a message stating that an NFC device has
been detected and a Wi-Fi connection has been established.
The Wireless Mobile Utility will launch automatically.
2 Enable wireless security.
The connection will initially be unprotected by passwords or
other security features.
Enable security using the Wireless
Mobile Utility on the smart device (0 257).
255
D Security
Although one of the benefits of a wireless-enabled device is that it
allows others to freely connect for the wireless exchange of data
anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not
enabled:
• Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless
transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal
information.
• Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the
network and alter data or perform other malicious actions.
Note that
due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow
unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
A NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard for short-
range wireless communications technology.
A Wi-Fi
Connecting to a smart device via NFC automatically enables the
Wi-Fi > Network connection option in the camera setup menu.
A No Connection
If you are unable to establish a connection using NFC as described
above, connect using another method (0 251).
A Disabling NFC
The NFC option in the setup menu is used to turn NFC on and off.
Select Disable to disable NFC connections.
256
Android: Other Wi-Fi Connection Options
WPS can be used with compatible smart devices.
Wireless
security is enabled automatically.
❚❚ Push-Button WPS
Adjust settings as follows to connect at
the push of a button:
• Camera: Select Wi-Fi > Network
settings > Push-button WPS in the
setup menu.
• Smart device: Select WPS button
connection in the Wi-Fi settings
menu.
❚❚ PIN-Entry WPS
To connect to a smart device using a PIN,
select Wi-Fi > Network settings > PIN-
entry WPS in the camera setup menu
and enter the PIN displayed by the smart
device.
Restoring Default Settings
To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network
settings > Reset network settings.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Ye s and press J to restore default
network settings.
A Terminating the Connection
Wi-Fi can be disabled by:
• Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the camera
setup menu
• Starting movie recording
• Connecting an optional UT-1 communication unit
• Turning the camera off
257
Wireless Security
Adjust security settings after establishing a Wi-Fi connection.
In
the case of WPS connections (0 256), security is enabled
automatically; no further adjustments to settings are required.
❚❚ Android OS
1 Display Wireless Mobile Utility
settings.
On the smart device, select the c icon at
the top right corner of the display or
open the settings menu in the Wireless
Mobile Utility home display.
2 Select Wireless Mobile Adapter
settings.
258
3 Select Authentication/encryption.
4 Select WPA2-PSK-AES.
Select WPA2-PSK-AES and select OK.
5 Select Password.
259
6 Enter a password.
Enter a password and select Save.
Passwords may be from 8 to 63
characters long.
7 Enable wireless security.
Select b.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select OK.
A Viewing Wireless Security Settings
To view the current password and authentication/encryption settings,
select Current settings in the Wireless Mobile Adapter settings
menu.
260
❚❚ iOS
1 Display Wireless Mobile Utility
settings.
On the smart device, select the c icon in
the Wireless Mobile Utility home display.
2 Select WMA settings.
3 Select Authentication.
261
4 Select WPA2-PSK-AES.
Select WPA2-PSK-AES.
Select WMA settings to return to the
WMA settings menu.
If you are prompted to enter a password,
select OK.
5 Select Password.
6 Enter a password.
Enter a password and select WMA
settings.
Passwords may be from 8 to
63 characters long.
262
7 Enable wireless security.
Select Settings.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
select OK.
The smart device will prompt you for this password the next
time you connect to the camera via Wi-Fi.
D Wi-Fi
Read the warnings on pages xx to xxii before using the Wi-Fi function.
To disable Wi-Fi in settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi >
Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu.
Note that
Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that the
standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on
the smart device is communicating with the camera.
If no data are
exchanged for about 5 minutes, the standby timer will turn off.
The
camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card is inserted
and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected.
To
prevent loss of power while connected, charge the battery before
enabling the network connection.
263
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart
device.
Movies can not be selected for upload.
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload
1 Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail or calendar playback.
2 Display playback options.
Press the i button to display playback
options.
3 Choose Select to send to smart
device/deselect.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device/deselect and press J.
Pictures selected for upload are
indicated by a & icon; to deselect,
display or highlight the image and
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
i button
264
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to change the upload status of multiple
pictures.
1 Choose Select to send to smart device.
Highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu, then highlight Select to
send to smart device and press 2.
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures and press W (S) to select
or deselect.
Selected pictures are
marked by a & icon.
3 Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
Selecting Pictures for Upload via NFC
If an NFC connection (0 254) is established during playback, the
image currently displayed full frame or highlighted in the
thumbnail list or calendar playback is automatically marked for
upload.
1 Display or highlight the desired image.
Display the picture full frame or highlight it in the thumbnail
list or calendar playback.
2 Connect.
Touch the camera N (N-Mark) logo to the smart device NFC
antenna until the camera displays a message stating that an
NFC device has been detected.
The picture will be marked
with a & icon to show that it has been selected for upload.
266
Menu List
This section lists the options available in the camera menus.
For
more information, see the Menu Guide.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
Delete
Selected Delete multiple images (0 248).
Select date
All
Playback folder (defaults to D7200)
D7200 Choose a folder for playback.
All
Current
Hide image
Select/set Hide or reveal images.
Hidden images
are displayed only in the “Hide image”
menu and cannot be played back.
Select date
Deselect all
Playback display options
Basic photo info Choose the information available in the
playback photo information display
(0 234).
Focus point
Additional photo info
None (image only)
Highlights
RGB histogram
Shooting data
Overview
267
Copy image(s)
Select source Copy pictures from one memory card to
another.
This option is only available
when two memory cards are inserted in
the camera.
Select image(s)
Select destination folder
Copy image(s)?
Image review (defaults to Off)
On Choose whether pictures are
automatically displayed in the monitor
immediately after shooting (0 230).
Off
After delete (defaults to Show next)
Show next Choose the picture displayed after an
image is deleted.
Show previous
Continue as before
Rotate tall (defaults to On)
On Choose whether to rotate “tall”
(portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback (0 230).
Off
Slide show
Start View a slide show of the pictures in the
current playback folder.
Image type
Frame interval
DPOF print order
Select/set Select images for printing with a DPOF-
compatible print service or printer, and
choose the number of prints.
Deselect all
268
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Photo Shooting
Options
Reset photo shooting menu
Ye s Select Ye s to restore photo shooting
menu options to their default values.
No
Storage folder
Select folder by number Select the folder in which subsequent
images will be stored.
Select folder from list
File naming
File naming Choose the three-letter prefix used in
naming the image files in which
photographs are stored.
The default
prefix is “DSC”.
Role played by card in Slot 2 (defaults to Overflow)
Overflow Choose the role played by the card in
Slot 2 when two memory cards are
inserted in the camera (0 82).
Backup
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2
Image quality (defaults to JPEG normal)
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine Choose a file format and compression
ratio (image quality, 0 77).
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG basic
269
Image size (defaults to Large)
Large Choose the image size, in pixels (0 81).
Medium
Small
Image area (defaults to DX (24×16))
DX (24×16) Choose the image area (0 73).
1.3× (18×12)
JPEG compression (defaults to Size priority)
Size priority Choose a compression type for JPEG
images (0 80).
Optimal quality
NEF (RAW) recording
Type Choose the type of compression and
the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images
(0 80).
NEF (RAW) bit depth
White balance (defaults to Auto)
Auto Match white balance to the light source
(0 111).
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
Shade
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
270
Set Picture Control (defaults to Standard)
Standard Choose how new photos will be
processed.
Select according to the type
of scene or your creative intent (0 130).
Neutral
Vivid
Monochrome
Portrait
Landscape
Flat
Manage Picture Control
Save/edit Create custom Picture Controls (0 135).
Rename
Delete
Load/save
Color space (defaults to sRGB)
sRGB Choose a color space for photographs.
Adobe RGB
Active D-Lighting (defaults to Off (modes P, S, A, M, %, g, i, u, 1, 2, and 3)
or Auto (other modes))
Auto Preserve details in highlights and
shadows, creating photographs with
natural contrast (0 139).
Extra high
High
Normal
Low
Off
HDR (high dynamic range)
HDR mode Preserve details in highlights and
shadows when photographing high-
contrast scenes (0 141).
HDR strength
271
Vignette control (defaults to Normal)
High Reduce the drop in brightness at the
edges of photographs when using type
G, E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded).
The effect is most noticeable at
maximum aperture.
Normal
Low
Off
Auto distortion control (defaults to Off)
On Reduce barrel distortion when shooting
with wide-angle lenses and to reduce
pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses.
Off
Long exposure NR (defaults to Off)
On Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in
photos taken at slow shutter speeds.
Off
High ISO NR (defaults to Normal)
High Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels) in photos taken at high
ISO sensitivities.
Normal
Low
Off
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for
photographs (0 99, 102).
Hi ISO command dial access
Auto ISO sensitivity control
272
Remote control mode (ML-L3) (defaults to Off)
Delayed remote Choose how the camera behaves when
used with an ML-L3 remote control.
Quick-response remote
Remote mirror-up
Off
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure mode Record two or three NEF (RAW)
exposures as a single photograph
(0 211).
Number of shots
Auto gain
Interval timer shooting
Start Take photographs at the selected
interval until the specified number of
shots has been recorded (0 217).
Start options
Interval
No. of intervals×shots/interval
Exposure smoothing
273
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting
Options
Reset movie shooting menu
Ye s Select Ye s to restore movie shooting
menu options to their default values.
No
File naming
Choose the three-letter prefix used in
naming the image files in which movies
are stored.
The default prefix is “DSC”.
Destination (defaults to Slot 1)
Slot 1 Choose the slot to which movies are
recorded.
Slot 2
Frame size/frame rate (defaults to 1920×1080; 30p)
1920×1080; 60p Choose movie frame size (in pixels) and
frame rate (0 166).
1920×1080; 50p
1920×1080; 30p
1920×1080; 25p
1920×1080; 24p
1280× 720; 60p
1280× 720; 50p
Movie quality (defaults to Normal)
High quality Choose movie quality (0 166).
Normal
Microphone sensitivity (defaults to Auto sensitivity)
Auto sensitivity Turn the built-in or optional stereo
microphones on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity.
Manual sensitivity
Microphone off
274
Frequency response (defaults to Wide range)
Wide range Choose the frequency response for the
built-in microphone and optional stereo
microphones.
Vocal range
Wind noise reduction (defaults to Off)
On Choose whether to enable the built-in
microphone’s low-cut filter to reduce
wind noise.
Off
Image area (defaults to DX (24×16))
DX (24×16) Choose the image area (0 168).
1.3× (18×12)
White balance (defaults to Same as photo settings)
Same as photo settings Choose the white balance for movies
(0 112).
Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently
selected for photos.
Auto
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight
Cloudy
Shade
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
275
Set Picture Control (defaults to Same as photo settings)
Same as photo settings Choose a Picture Control for movies
(0 130).
Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently
selected for photos.
Standard
Neutral
Vivid
Monochrome
Portrait
Landscape
Flat
Manage Picture Control
Save/edit Create custom Picture Controls (0 132).
Rename
Delete
Load/save
High ISO NR (defaults to Normal)
High Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels) in movies recorded at high
ISO sensitivities.
Normal
Low
Off
Movie ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity (mode M) Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for
movies.
Auto ISO control (mode M)
Maximum sensitivity
Time-lapse photography
Start The camera automatically takes photos
at selected intervals to create a silent
time-lapse movie (0 171).
Interval
Shooting time
Exposure smoothing
276
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Reset custom settings
Ye s Select Ye s to restore Custom Settings to
their default values.
No
a Autofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection (defaults to Release)
Release When AF-C is selected for viewfinder
photography, this option controls
whether photographs can be taken
whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed (release priority) or only when
the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Focus
a2 AF-S priority selection (defaults to Focus)
Release When AF-S is selected for viewfinder
photography, this option controls
whether photographs can be taken only
when the camera is in focus (focus
priority) or whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Focus
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on (defaults to 3 (Normal))
5 (Long) Choose how continuous-servo
autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject
(continuous-servo AF takes effect when
AF-C is selected for focus mode during
viewfinder photography or if the
camera selects continuous-servo in AF-A
mode).
4
3 (Normal)
2
1 (Short)
Off
277
a4 AF activation (defaults to Shutter/AF-ON)
Shutter/AF-ON Choose whether the camera focuses
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
If AF-ON only is
selected, the camera will not focus
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
AF-ON only
a5 Focus point illumination
AF point illumination Enable or disable viewfinder focus point
illumination.
Manual focus mode
a6 Focus point wrap-around (defaults to No wrap)
Wrap Choose whether viewfinder focus-point
selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the display to another.
No wrap
a7 Number of focus points (defaults to 51 points)
51 points Choose the number of focus points
available for manual focus-point
selection in the viewfinder.
11 points
a8 Store points by orientation (defaults to No)
Ye s Choose whether the viewfinder stores
the focus points for vertical and
horizontal orientations separately.
No
a9 Built-in AF-assist illuminator (defaults to On)
On Choose whether the built-in AF-assist
illuminator lights to assist the focus
operation when lighting is poor.
Off
278
b Metering/exposure
b1 ISO sensitivity step value (defaults to 1/3 step)
1/3 step Select the increments used when
making adjustments to ISO sensitivity.
1/2 step
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl (defaults to 1/3 step)
1/3 step Select the increments used when
making adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, exposure and flash
compensation, and bracketing.
1/2 step
b3 Easy exposure compensation (defaults to Off)
On (Auto reset) If On (Auto reset) or On is selected,
exposure compensation can be
adjusted in modes P and S by rotating
the sub-command dial or in mode A by
rotating the main command dial.
On
Off
b4 Center-weighted area (defaults to 8mm)
6mm Choose the size of the area given the
most weight in center-weighted
metering.
If a non-CPU lens is attached,
the size of the area is fixed at 8 mm.
8mm
10 mm
13 mm
Average
b5 Fine-tune optimal exposure (defaults to No)
Ye s Fine-tune exposure for each metering
method.
Higher values produce
brighter exposures, lower values darker
exposures.
No
279
c Timers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L (defaults to Off)
On Choose whether exposure locks when
the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
Off
c2 Standby timer (defaults to 6 s)
4 s Choose how long the camera continues
to meter exposure when no operations
are performed (0 37).
6 s
10 s
30 s
1 min
5 min
10 min
30 min
No limit
c3 Self-timer
Self-timer delay Choose the length of the shutter release
delay, the number of shots taken, and
the interval between shots in self-timer
mode.
Number of shots
Interval between shots
c4 Monitor off delay
Playback Choose how long the monitor remains
on when no operations are performed.
Menus
Information display
Image review
Live view
c5 Remote on duration (ML-L3) (defaults to 1 min)
1 min Select the length of time the camera will
wait for a signal from the remote before
cancelling remote control mode
(0 156).
5 min
10 min
15 min
280
d Shooting/display
d1 Beep
Volume Choose the pitch and volume of the
beep.
Pitch
d2 Continuous low-speed (defaults to 3 fps)
6 fps Choose the maximum frame advance
rate in C
L mode (note that the frame
advance rate in live view will not exceed
3.7 fps even when values of 4 fps or
faster are selected).
5 fps
4 fps
3 fps
2 fps
1 fps
d3 Max. continuous release (defaults to 100)
1–100 Choose the maximum number of shots
that can be taken in a single burst in
continuous release mode.
d4 Exposure delay mode (defaults to Off)
3 s In situations where the slightest camera
movement can blur pictures, select 1s,
2s, or 3s to delay shutter release until
approximately one, two, or three
seconds after the mirror is raised.
2 s
1 s
Off
d5 Flash warning (defaults to On)
On If On is selected, the flash-ready
indicator (M) will blink if the flash is
required to ensure optimal exposure.
Off
d6 File number sequence (defaults to On)
On Choose how the camera assigns file
numbers.
Off
Reset
d7 Viewfinder grid display (defaults to Off)
On Choose whether to display a framing
grid in the viewfinder.
Off
281
d8 Easy ISO (defaults to Off)
On If On is selected, ISO sensitivity can be
set in modes P and S by rotating the sub-
command dial or in mode A by rotating
the main command dial.
Off
d9 Information display (defaults to Auto)
Auto Change the appearance of the
information display (0 185) for
conditions in which the monitor is hard
to read (for example, when lighting is
too bright or too dark).
Manual
d10 LCD illumination (defaults to Off)
On Choose whether the control panel is
illuminated while the standby timer is
active.
Off
d11 MB-D15 battery type (defaults to LR6 (AA alkaline))
LR6 (AA alkaline) To ensure that the camera functions as
expected when the optional MB-D15
battery pack is used with AA batteries,
match the option selected in this menu
to the type of batteries inserted in the
battery pack.
There is no need to adjust
this option when using EN-EL15
batteries.
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
FR6 (AA lithium)
d12 Battery order (defaults to Use MB-D15 batteries first)
Use MB-D15 batteries first Choose whether the battery in the
camera or the batteries in the battery
pack are used first when an optional
MB-D15 battery pack is attached.
Use camera battery first
282
e Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed (defaults to 1/250 s)
1/320 s (Auto FP) Choose a flash sync speed.
1/250 s (Auto FP)
1/250 s
1/200 s
1/160 s
1/125 s
1/100 s
1/80 s
1/60 s
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M, select the
next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or
%).
An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and
control panel.
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Selecting an “Auto FP” option allows compatible flash units to be used
at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera (0 314).
Auto
FP high-speed sync is enabled automatically at shutter speeds faster
than the chosen flash sync speed (
1
/
320 s or
1
/
250 s depending on the
option selected), allowing wider apertures for reduced depth of field
even in daylight.
If the shutter-speed displays in the control panel and
viewfinder show a value equal to the flash sync speed in modes P and
A, auto FP high-speed sync will still be activated if the actual shutter
speed is even slightly faster.
283
e2 Flash shutter speed (defaults to 1/60 s)
1/60 s Choose the slowest shutter available
when the flash is used in modes P and A.
1/30 s
1/15 s
1/8 s
1/4 s
1/2 s
1 s
2 s
4 s
8 s
15 s
30 s
e3 Flash cntrl for built-in flash (defaults to TTL)
TTL Choose the flash control mode for the
built-in flash.
Manual
Repeating flash
Commander mode
e3 Optional flash (defaults to TTL)
TTL Choose the flash control mode for
optional flash units.
Manual
Commander mode
e4 Exposure comp. for flash (defaults to Entire frame)
Entire frame Choose how the camera adjusts flash
level when exposure compensation is
used.
Background only
284
e5 Modeling flash (defaults to On)
On Choose whether the built-in flash unit
and optional CLS-compatible flash units
(0 144, 311) emit a modeling flash
when the camera Pv button is pressed
during viewfinder photography (0 55).
Off
e6 Auto bracketing set (defaults to AE & flash)
AE & flash Choose the setting or settings
bracketed when auto bracketing is in
effect (0 197).
AE only
Flash only
WB bracketing
ADL bracketing
e7 Bracketing order (defaults to MTR > under > over)
MTR > under > over Choose the bracketing order for
exposure, flash, and white balance
bracketing.
Under > MTR > over
f Controls
f1 OK button
Shooting mode Choose the roles assigned to the J
button during viewfinder photography,
playback, and live view.
Playback mode
Live view
f2 Assign Fn button
Press Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials).
Press + command dials
285
f3 Assign preview button
Press Choose the role played by the Pv button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials).
Press + command dials
f4 Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Press Choose the role played by the A AE-L/
AF-L button, either by itself (Press) or
when used in combination with the
command dials (Press + command
dials).
Press + command dials
f5 Customize command dials
Reverse rotation Choose the roles played by the main
and sub-command dials.
Change main/sub
Aperture setting
Menus and playback
Sub-dial frame advance
f6 Release button to use dial (defaults to No)
Ye s Selecting Ye s allows adjustments that
are normally made by holding a button
and rotating a command dial to be
made by rotating the command dial
after the button is released.
Setting
ends when the button is pressed again,
the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, or the standby timer expires.
No
286
f7 Slot empty release lock (defaults to Enable release)
Release locked Choose whether the shutter can be
released when no memory card is
inserted.
Enable release
f8 Reverse indicators (defaults to )
If (W) is selected, the
exposure indicators in the control panel,
viewfinder, and information display are
displayed with negative values on the
left and positive values on the right.
Select (V) to display
positive values on the left and negative
values on the right.
f9 Assign movie record button
Press + command dials Choose the role played by the movie-
record button and command dials
during viewfinder and photo live view.
f10 Assign MB-D15 4 button (defaults to AE/AF lock)
AE/AF lock Choose the function assigned to the
A AE-L/AF-L button on the optional
MB-D15 battery pack.
AE lock only
AE lock (Hold)
AF lock only
AF-ON
FV lock
Same as camera Fn button
287
f11 Assign remote (WR) Fn button (defaults to None)
Preview Choose the role played by the Fn button
on the optional wireless remote
controller.
FV lock
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (Hold)
AF lock only
Flash off
+ NEF (RAW)
Live view
Same as camera Fn button
Same as camera Pv button
Same as camera 4 button
None
288
g Movie
g1 Assign Fn button
Press Choose the role played by the Fn button
when 1 is selected with the live view
selector in live view.
g2 Assign preview button
Press Choose the role played by the Pv button
when 1 is selected with the live view
selector in live view.
g3 Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Press Choose the role played by the A AE-L/
AF-L button when 1 is selected with the
live view selector in live view.
g4 Assign shutter button (defaults to Take photos)
Take photos Choose the role played by the shutter-
release button when 1 is selected with
the live view selector.
If Record movies
is selected, pressing the button halfway
starts live view.
You can then press the
shutter-release button halfway to focus
(autofocus mode only) and press all the
way down to start or end movie
recording.
To end live view, press the a
button.
Record movies
A g4: Assign Shutter Button > Record Movies
To use the shutter-release button for purposes other than movie
recording, rotate the live view selector to C.
289
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Format memory card
Slot 1 To begin formatting, choose a memory
card slot and select Ye s .
Note that
formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card in the
selected slot.
Before formatting, be sure
to make backup copies as required.
Slot 2
Save user settings
Save to U1 Assign frequently-used settings to the
U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial
(0 63).
Save to U2
Reset user settings
Reset U1 To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default
values (0 65).
Reset U2
Monitor brightness (defaults to 0)
–5 – +5 Adjust the brightness of the menu,
playback, and information displays.
A Formatting Memory Cards
Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery or memory cards
during formatting.
In addition to the Format memory card option in the setup menu,
memory cards can be formatted using the O (Q) and Z (Q) buttons:
keep both buttons pressed simultaneously until formatting indicators
are displayed and then press the buttons again to format the card.
If
two memory cards are inserted when the buttons are first pressed, the
card to be formatted will be shown by a flashing icon.
Rotate the main
command dial to choose a different slot.
290
Monitor color balance (defaults to 0)
Adjust monitor color balance.
Clean image sensor
Clean now Vibrate the image sensor to remove
dust (0 321).
Clean at startup/shutdown
Lock mirror up for cleaning
Start Lock the mirror up so that dust can be
removed from the image sensor with a
blower.
Not available when the battery
is low (J or lower).
Image Dust Off ref photo
Start Acquire reference data for the Image
Dust Off option in Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Clean sensor and then start
Flicker reduction (defaults to Auto)
Auto Reduce flicker and banding when
shooting under fluorescent or mercury-
vapor lighting during live view.
50 Hz
60 Hz
Time zone and date
Time zone Change time zones, set the camera
clock, choose the date display order,
and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Date and time
Date format
Daylight saving time
Language
See page 357. Choose a language for camera menus
and messages.
Auto image rotation (defaults to On)
On Choose whether to record camera
orientation when taking photographs.
Off
291
Battery info
View information on the battery
currently inserted in the camera or in an
optional MB-D15 battery pack.
Image comment
Attach comment Add a comment to new photographs as
they are taken.
Comments can be
viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Input comment
Copyright information
Attach copyright information Add copyright information to new
photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX-i or in
Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Artist
Copyright
Save/load settings
Save settings Save camera settings to or load camera
settings from a memory card.
Settings
files can be shared with other D7200
cameras.
Load settings
Virtual horizon
View a virtual horizon with a roll display
based on information from the camera
tilt sensor.
Non-CPU lens data
Lens number Record the focal length and maximum
aperture of non-CPU lenses, allowing
them to be used with functions
normally reserved for CPU lenses
(0 224).
Focal length (mm)
Maximum aperture
292
AF fine-tune
AF fine-tune (On/Off) Fine-tune focus for different lens types.
AF tuning is not recommended in most
situations and may interfere with
normal focus; use only when required.
Saved value
Default
List saved values
HDMI
Output resolution Choose an output resolution or enable
the camera for remote control from
devices that support HDMI-CEC.
Device control
Advanced
Location data
Standby timer Adjust settings for optional GP-1 and
GP-1A GPS units.
Position
Set clock from satellite
Wi-Fi
Network connection Adjust Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) settings for
connection to an Android or iOS smart
device, or select pictures for upload to a
smart device (0 251).
Network settings
Select to send to smart device
NFC (defaults to Enable)
Enable If Enable is selected, wireless
connections can be established simply
by touching the camera N (N-Mark)
logo to the NFC antennas on
compatible smart devices (0 254).
Disable
293
Network
Choose hardware Adjust ftp and network settings for
Ethernet and wireless LANs when an
optional UT-1 communications unit
(0 319) is connected.
Network settings
Options
Eye-Fi upload
Slot 1 Upload pictures to a preselected
destination.
This option is displayed
only when a supported Eye-Fi card is
inserted.
Slot 2
Conformity marking
View a selection of the standards with
which the camera complies.
Firmware version
View the current camera firmware
version.
294
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
D-Lighting
Brighten shadows.
Choose for dark or
backlit photographs.
Red-eye correction
Correct “red-eye” in photos taken with a
flash.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph (0 298).
Monochrome
Black-and-white Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Sepia
Cyanotype
Filter effects
Skylight Create the effects of the following
filters:
• Skylight: A skylight filter effect
• Warm filter: A warm tone filter effect
• Cross screen: Adds starburst effects to
light sources
• Soft: A soft filter effect
Warm filter
Cross screen
Soft
Image overlay
Image overlay combines two existing
NEF (RAW) photographs to create a
single picture that is saved separately
from the originals (0 299).
Image
overlay can only be selected by
pressing G and selecting N tab.
295
NEF (RAW) processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
photographs (0 302).
Resize
Select image Create small copies of selected
photographs.
Choose destination
Choose size
Quick retouch
Create copies with enhanced saturation
and contrast.
Straighten
Create straightened copies.
Copies can
be straightened by up to 5° in
increments of approximately 0.25°.
Distortion control
Auto Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion.
Use to reduce barrel
distortion in photos taken with wide-
angle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in
photos taken with telephoto lenses.
Select Auto to let the camera correct
distortion automatically.
Manual
Fisheye
Create copies that appear to have been
taken with a fisheye lens.
Color outline
Create an outline copy of a photograph
to use as a base for painting.
Color sketch
Create a copy of a photograph that
resembles a sketch made with colored
pencils.
296
Perspective control
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object.
Miniature effect
Create a copy that appears to be a
photo of a diorama.
Use the multi
selector to choose the position and
orientation of the area in focus.
Works
best with photos taken from a high
vantage point.
Selective color
Create a copy in which only selected
hues appear in color.
Position the cursor
over objects with desired colors and
press the A AE-L/AF-L button.
The
selected colors (maximum three)
appear in the frames at the top of the
display; rotate the main command dial
to highlight a frame and press 1 or 3 to
increase or decrease the range of hues
selected.
Edit movie
Choose start/end point Trim footage to create edited copies of
movies or save selected frames as JPEG
stills (0 179).
Save selected frame
Side-by-side comparison
Compare retouched copies to the
original photographs.
Side-by-side
comparison is only available if the
retouch menu is displayed by pressing i
and selecting Retouch in full-frame
playback when a retouched image or
original is displayed.
297
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
Add items
PLAYBACK MENU Create a custom menu of up to 20 items
selected from the playback, photo
shooting, movie shooting, Custom
Setting, setup, and retouch menus.
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
MOVIE SHOOTING MENU
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
SETUP MENU
RETOUCH MENU
Remove items
Delete items from My Menu.
Rank items
Rank items in My Menu.
Choose tab (defaults to MY MENU)
MY MENU Choose the menu displayed in the “My
Menu/Recent Settings” tab.
Select
RECENT SETTINGS to display a menu
listing the 20 most recently-used
settings.
RECENT SETTINGS
298
This section details retouch menu options.
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph.
The selected
photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow;
create a cropped copy as described in the following table.
Retouch Menu Options
To Use Description
Reduce size of crop
W (S)
Press W (S) to reduce the size of the
crop.
Increase size of crop
X (T)
Press X (T) to increase the size of
the crop.
Change crop aspect
ratio
Rotate the main command dial to
choose the aspect ratio.
Position crop
Use multi selector to position the crop.
Press and hold to move the crop rapidly
to the desired position.
Create copy
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
A Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW) or NEF
(RAW ) + JPEG photos have an image quality
(0 77) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created
from JPEG photos have the same image
quality as the original.
The size of the copy
varies with crop size and aspect ratio and
appears at upper left in the crop display.
A Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
299
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging
application.
The new picture is saved at current image quality
and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality
and size (0 77, 81; all options are available).
To create a NEF
(RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2.
The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted;
press J to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images
created with this camera.
2 Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay.
To
view the highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X (T)
button.
Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and return to
the preview display.
+
300
3 Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1.
Highlight
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as
described in Step 2.
4 Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and
optimize exposure for the overlay by
pressing 1 or 3 to select gain from
values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat
for the second image.
The default
value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or
2.0 to double it.
The effects are visible in the Preview
column.
5 Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition as shown
at right, press 4 or 2 to place the
cursor in the Preview column, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay
and press J (note that colors and
brightness in the preview may differ
from the final image).
To save the overlay without displaying
a preview, select Save.
To return to Step 4 and select new
photos or adjust gain, press W (S).
6 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay.
After an
overlay is created, the resulting image
will be displayed full-frame in the
monitor.
301
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit depth
can be combined.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation), and values for
white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for
Image 1.
The current image comment is appended to the overlay
when it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied.
Overlays saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for
Type in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth
as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority
compression.
302
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1 Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in
the retouch menu and press 2 to
display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera.
2 Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
photograph (to view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press and hold
the X/T button).
Press J to select
the highlighted photograph and
proceed to the next step.
303
3 Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below.
Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or
pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and
+2 EV.
4 Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected photograph
(to exit without copying the
photograph, press the G button).
Vignette control (0 271)
Image quality (0 77)
Image size (0 81)
White balance (0 111)
Exposure compensation (0 109)
Set Picture Control (0 130)
D-Lighting (0 294)
Color space (0 270)
High ISO NR (0 271)
304
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the
camera.
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
Focus mode
Shooting
mode
Metering system
Lens/accessory
AF
M (with electronic
rangefinder)
1
P
S
A
M
L
2
M
3
N
4
3D Color
CPU lenses
5
Type G, E, or D AF
NIKKOR
6
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
✔✔✔✔✔— ✔
7
PC-E NIKKOR series
8
— ✔
9
✔
9
✔
9
✔
9
— ✔
7,9
PC Micro 85mm
f/2.8D
10
— ✔
9
— ✔
11
✔ — ✔
7,9
AF-S / AF-I
Teleconverter
12
✔✔✔✔✔— ✔
7
Other AF NIKKOR
(except lenses for
F3AF)
✔
13
✔
13
✔✔— ✔✔
7
AI-P NIKKOR — ✔
14
✔✔— ✔✔
7
305
1 Manual focus available with all lenses.
2Matrix.
3 Center-weighted.
4Spot.
5 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
6 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
7 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 105).
8 The tilt knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the
lens is revolved.
9 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
10 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when
shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is
used.
11 Manual shooting mode only.
Non-CPU lenses
15
AI-, AI-modified
NIKKOR or Nikon
Series E lenses
16
— ✔
14
— ✔
17
— ✔
18
✔
19
Medical-NIKKOR
120mm f/4
— ✔ — ✔
20
———
Reflex-NIKKOR — — — ✔
17
——✔
19
PC-NIKKOR — ✔
9
— ✔
21
—— ✔
AI-type
Teleconverter
22
— ✔
23
— ✔
17
— ✔
18
✔
19
PB-6 Bellows
Focusing
Attachment
24
— ✔
23
— ✔
25
—— ✔
Auto extension rings
(PK-series 11A, 12, or
13; PN-11)
— ✔
23
— ✔
17
—— ✔
Camera setting
Focus mode
Shooting
mode
Metering system
Lens/accessory
AF
M (with electronic
rangefinder)
1
P
S
A
M
L
2
M
3
N
4
3D Color
306
12 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0 307).
For information on the focus points
available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 307.
13 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF
28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at maximum zoom, in-focus
indicator (I) may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus.
Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.
14 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
15 Some lenses can not be used (see page 308).
16 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body.
Filters
can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
17 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 225), aperture value
will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.
18 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU
lens data (0 225).
Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not
achieved.
19 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non-CPU
lens data (0 225).
20 Can be used in mode M at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
21 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture.
In mode A, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens.
In mode M, preset aperture using
lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
22 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–105mm
f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D.
23 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
24 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring.
PB-6D may be required depending on camera
orientation.
25 Use preset aperture.
In mode A, set aperture using focusing attachment before determining
exposure and taking photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• With some lenses, noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO
sensitivities.
Use manual focus or focus lock.
307
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G, E, and D) are recommended, but note
that IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
CPU lenses can be identified by
the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a letter on the
lens barrel.
Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture
ring.
CPU contacts Aperture ring
CPU lens Type G/E lens Type D lens
A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters
If the combined aperture when the camera is used with
an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is slower than f/5.6 but is
equal to or faster than f/8, autofocus and electronic
rangefinding will be available only with the center focus point and the
camera may be unable to focus on dark or low-contrast subjects.
Single point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected
for AF-area mode (0 86).
Autofocus is not available if teleconverters
are used with the AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED.
If
TC-17E II, TC-20E, TC-20E II, or TC-20E III teleconverters are used with
the AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/4E PF ED VR, autofocus is available only in
AF-S mode.
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the
lens.
308
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lens data (0 225) can be used to enable many of the
features available with CPU lenses, including color matrix metering; if
no data are provided, center-weighted metering will be used in place
of color matrix metering, while if the maximum aperture is not
provided, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops
from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read
off the lens aperture ring.
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can
NOT be used with the D7200:
• TC-16A AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit
(400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,
1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8,
OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers
174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF
200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or
earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–
906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)
D Red-Eye Reduction
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may
interfere with red-eye reduction.
309
A AF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 18–
200 mm.
Some lenses may block the illuminator at certain focus
distances.
Remove lens hoods when using the illuminator.
More
information on lenses that can be used with the AF-assist illuminator
may be found in the camera Menu Guide, which is available for
download from the following website:
http://nikonimglib.com/manual/
A The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be
used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses.
It can be used with
CPU lenses with focal lengths of 16–300 mm, although in some cases
the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or
focal lengths due to shadows cast by the lens.
The following
illustrations show the effect of vignetting caused by shadows cast by
the lens when the flash is used.
Shadow Vignetting
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
More information on lenses
that can be used with the built-in flash may be found in the camera
Menu Guide, which is available for download from the following
website:
http://nikonimglib.com/manual/
310
A Calculating Angle of View
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm.
The
size of the area exposed by the D7200 when DX (24×16) is selected for
Image area in the photo shooting menu, in contrast, is 23.5 ×
15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is
approximately 1.5 times that of the D7200 (when 1.3× (18×12) is
selected, the size of the area exposed decreases, further reducing the
angle of view by about 1.3×).
Lens
35 mm format picture size (36 × 24 mm)
Picture diagonal
Picture size when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for
Image area (18.8 × 12.5 mm)
35 mm format angle of view
Angle of view when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area
Picture size when DX (24×16) is selected for
Image area (23.5 × 15.6 mm)
Angle of view when DX (24×16) is selected for Image area
311
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units.
The built-in
flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers
improved communication between the camera and compatible
flash units for improved flash photography.
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
• The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, SB-400, SB-300, and
SB-R200:
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
Flash unit
SB-910,
SB-900
1
SB-800
SB-700
1
SB-600
SB-500
2
SB-400
3
SB-300
3
SB-R200
4
Feature
Guide No. (ISO 100)
5
34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 24/78 21/69 18/59 10/33
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or M (flash) is selected
for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance
appropriately.
2 Users of the LED light can set camera white balance to v or M for optimal results.
3 Wireless flash control is not available.
4 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
5 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;
SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
312
• SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLS-
compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander
for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or
SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups.
The SU-800 itself is
not equipped with a flash.
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture.
If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet,
111÷5.6=approximately 19 ft 10 in.).
For each twofold increase in ISO
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two
(approximately 1.4).
A The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be
connected via a sync terminal.
313
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for
digital SLR
1
z zzz——zz
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for
digital SLR
z
2
zz
2
z ——zz
AA
Auto aperture z
3
———————
A
Non-TTL auto z
3
———————
GN
Distance-priority manual zz——————
M
Manual zzzz
4
——z
4
z
4
RPT
Repeating flash z ———————
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control zz— z
4
z ———
i-TTL
i-TTL zz— z
4
————
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash control — z ——z
5
———
AA
Auto aperture z
6
———————
A
Non-TTL auto z ———————
M
Manual zz— z
4
————
RPT
Repeating flash z ———————
Remote
i-TTL
i-TTL z zzz— z ——
[A:B]
Quick wireless flash control z zzz— z ——
AA
Auto aperture z
6
———————
A
Non-TTL auto z ———————
M
Manual z zzz— z ——
RPT
Repeating flash z zzz————
Color Information Communication (flash) z zzz——zz
Color Information Communication (LED light) — — — z ————
314
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
Unless lens data have
been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu, “A” will be
selected when a non-CPU lens is used.
4 Can only be selected with camera.
5 Available only during close-up photography.
6 Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup
menu, non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash
unit.
7 Available only in i-TTL, AA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
8 Availalbe only in i-TTL, AA, and A flash-control modes.
9 Available only in commander mode.
10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
Auto FP High-Speed Sync
7
z zzzzz——
FV lock
8
z zzzzzzz
AF-assist for multi-area AF zzz— z
9
———
Red-eye reduction zzzz——z —
Camera modeling illumination z zzzzz——
Camera flash mode selection — — — z ——zz
Camera flash unit firmware update z
10
z — z ———z
A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
FV lock (0 153) is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where
supported) monitor pre-flash AA and monitor pre-flash A flash control
modes.
Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to control
remote flash units, you will need to set the flash control mode for the
master or at least one remote group to TTL or AA.
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
315
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and
manual modes.
Flash unit SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
SB-50DX
1
SB-30, SB-27
2
,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-15
SB-23,
SB-29
3
,
SB-21B
3
,
SB-29S
3
Flash mode
ANon-TTL auto ✔ — ✔ —
MManual ✔✔✔✔
G Repeating flash ✔ ———
REAR Rear-curtain sync
4
✔✔✔✔
1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled.
Set flash unit to A (non-
TTL auto flash).
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
A Metering
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as
follows:
Flash unit Flash mode Metered area
Stand-alone flash
unit
i-TTL 4-mm circle in center of frame
AA
Area metered by flash
exposure meter
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting)
i-TTL Entire frame
AA
Area metered by flash
exposure meter
A (master flash)
316
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions.
If the flash unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras.
The D7200 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %,
and u, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the
built-in flash can not be used.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved
at some ranges or aperture settings.
If the flash-ready indicator (M)
flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or
non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the
photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only;
for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other
units, see the manual provided with the flash).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash control.
Take a
test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit.
Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
317
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400
provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following
restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available
when 17–135 mm AF lenses are used with the focus
points shown at right.
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available when 24–105 mm
AF lenses are used with the focus points
shown at right.
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available when 24–
135 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points
shown at right.
Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited
according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4 4.8 5.6 6.7 8 9.5 11 13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
318
A Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional
flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe as follows:
Flash sync Auto FP (0 282)
i-TTL
Auto aperture (AA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority
manual (GN)
Manual
Repeating flash —
Advanced wireless
lighting
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units.
Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
Before
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-
authorized service representative for more information.
319
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available
for the D7200.
Other Accessories
Power sources
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL15 (0 21, 22)
• Battery Charger MH-25a (0 21)
• Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D15
• Power Connector EP-5B, AC Adapter EH-5b
Viewfinder eyepiece
accessories
• DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-21M
• Magnifier DG-2
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-22
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6
Remote controls/
wireless remote
controllers/
remote cords
• Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (0 156)
• Wireless Remote Controllers WR-T10 and WR-R10
(0 160)
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (0 160)
• Remote Cord MC-DC2 (0 58)
GPS units • GPS Unit GP-1/GPS Unit GP-1A (0 227)
LAN adapters
• Communication Unit UT-1
• Wireless Transmitter WT-5
HDMI cables HDMI Cable HC-E1
Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0 193)
Accessory shoe covers Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1
Body cap Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A
Software
• Camera Control Pro 2
• ViewNX-i
• Capture NX-D
Availability may vary with country or region.
See our website or brochures for the latest
information.
320
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place.
To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.
Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Caring for the Camera
Camera
body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with
a soft, dry cloth.
After using the camera at the beach or
seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened
in distilled water and dry thoroughly.
Important: Dust or
other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage
not covered under warranty.
Lens, mirror,
and
viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged.
Remove dust
and lint with a blower.
If using an aerosol blower, keep the
can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid.
To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower.
When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather.
Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
321
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu.
The sensor can be cleaned at
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
Holding the camera base down, select
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,
then highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check the image sensor
and then begin cleaning.
P flashes
in the control panel and other operations
can not be performed while cleaning is in
progress.
Do not remove or disconnect
the power source until cleaning ends and
the setup menu is displayed.
322
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Display the Clean image sensor
menu as described on page 321.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
Option Description
5
Clean at startup
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
each time the camera is turned on.
6
Clean at shutdown
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
during shutdown each time the camera is
turned off.
7
Clean at startup &
shutdown
The image sensor is cleaned automatically at
startup and at shutdown.
Cleaning off Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
323
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor
cleaning.
Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if
the flash is charging.
If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image
sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0 324) or consult a
Nikon-authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry.
Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
324
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor
using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu
(0 321), the sensor can be cleaned manually as described
below.
Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and
easily damaged.
Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned
only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the image sensor.
Turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and
power connector.
The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is
only available in the setup menu at battery levels over J.
2 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and highlight
Lock mirror up for cleaning in the
setup menu and press 2.
325
4 Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the control
panel and viewfinder.
To restore
normal operation without inspecting
the image sensor, turn the camera off.
5 Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down.
The mirror will be
raised and the shutter curtain will
open, revealing the image sensor.
The display in the viewfinder will
turn off and the row of dashes in the
control panel will flash.
6 Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
sensor for dust or lint.
If no foreign
objects are present, proceed to Step 8.
326
7 Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower.
Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor.
Dirt that can not
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel.
Under no circumstances should you touch or
wipe the sensor.
8 Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
A Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged.
If the camera
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close
automatically.
To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes.
End
cleaning or inspection immediately.
327
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap.
Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the
image sensor cleaning option as described on page 321.
If the
problem persists, clean the sensor manually (0 324) or have the
sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel.
Photographs
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be
retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging
applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing.
Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services).
Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally.
Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
328
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity.
Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device.
To prevent
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with
the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the
product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period.
Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry.
To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while
the AC adapter is connected.
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
329
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
In
rare instances, static electricity may cause LCDs to light up or go dark.
This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon return to
normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged.
Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid.
To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 321, 324) for information on cleaning
the image sensor.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and
easily damaged.
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the
curtain.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area.
If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire.
If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant.
Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate.
Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month.
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
330
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective.
Hence while these displays may contain
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the
device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction.
Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather.
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled.
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xiii of this
manual.
Observe the following precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover.
These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function.
If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the
camera for storage.
The battery should be stored in a cool location
with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot
or extremely cold locations).
Repeat this process at least once every six
months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life.
Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
331
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use.
Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature
is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially.
Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C
(41 °F–95 °F).
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance.
Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
The
battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
60 °C (140 °F).
• If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery.
If the
problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger
to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging.
Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged.
Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
• Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low
temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at
which it was charged.
If the battery is charged at a temperature below
5 °C (41 °F), the battery life indicator in the Battery info (0 291) display
may show a temporary decrease.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
332
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL15 battery.
• The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the
MH-25a only.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only.
Unplug
when not in use.
• Charge the battery before use.
When taking photographs on
important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase
replacement batteries on short notice.
Note that on cold days, the
capacity of batteries tends to decrease.
Be sure the battery is fully
charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather.
Keep a
spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.
Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
333
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
Troubleshooting
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end.
If the
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power
source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (0 25).
If this does not
correct the problem, select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 0 83), single-
point AF (0 86), and the center focus point (0 91), and then frame a
high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus the camera.
With the camera in focus,
use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus
in the viewfinder.
If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted
using optional corrective lenses (0 319).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 21, 26).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting
c2 (Standby timer) or c4 (Monitor off delay; 0 279).
Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim: The response
times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is
highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and
do not indicate a malfunction.
334
Shooting (All Modes)
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 22, 29).
• Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f7 (Slot empty release
lock; 0 286) and no memory card is inserted (0 29).
• Built-in flash is charging (0 36).
• Camera is not in focus (0 34).
• Aperture ring for CPU lens not locked at highest f-number (does not
apply to type G and E lenses).
If B is displayed in control panel,
select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f5 (Customize command
dials) > Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture
(0 285).
• Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode A or M (0 51).
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom
Setting d4 (Exposure delay mode; 0 280).
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:
• Replace battery in remote control.
• Choose an option other than Off for Remote control mode (ML-L3)
(0 156).
• Flash is charging (0 158).
• Time selected for Custom Setting c5 (Remote on duration (ML-L3),
0 279) has elapsed.
• Bright light is interfering with remote.
Photos are out of focus:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 83).
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus
lock (0 93, 97).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A AE-L/AF-L
button to lock focus when AF-C is selected for focus mode or when
photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode.
335
Can not select focus point:
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 89).
• Auto-area AF selected, or face detected when face-priority AF is
selected in live view: choose another mode (0 86, 88).
• Camera is in playback mode (0 229) or menus are in use (0 266).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 37).
Can not select AF mode: Manual focus selected (0 83, 97).
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (0 83, 97).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release
mode: Continuous shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (0 148).
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (0 77).
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
(0 271).
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus
mode (0 83) or if continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the
camera is in AF-A mode.
Choose AF-S.
If an option other than auto-area
AF is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus point (0 91).
• The camera is currently in live view.
• Off is selected for Custom Setting a9 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator,
0 277).
• Illuminator has turned off automatically.
Illuminator may become hot
with continued use; wait for it to cool down.
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements.
If
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0 321).
336
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:
• Bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and lines can be
reduced by lowering ISO sensitivity.
• Use the Long exposure NR option in the photo shooting menu to limit
the occurrence of bright spots or fog in photos taken at shutter speeds
slower than 1 s (0 271).
• Fog and bright spots may indicate that the camera’s internal
temperature has become elevated due to high ambient temperatures,
long exposures, or similar causes: turn the camera off and wait for it to
cool before resuming shooting.
• At high ISO sensitivities, lines may appear in photos taken with some
optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower value.
• At high ISO sensitivities, including Hi BW1 or Hi BW2 and high values
selected with auto ISO sensitivity control, randomly-spaced bright
pixels can be reduced by selecting High, Normal, or Low for High ISO
NR in the photo or movie shooting menu (0 271, 275).
• At high ISO sensitivities, bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels,
fog, or lines may be more noticeable in long exposures, multiple
exposures, and photos taken at high ambient temperatures or with
Active D-Lighting enabled, Flat selected for Set Picture Control
(0 130) or extreme values selected for Picture Control parameters
(0 133).
• In % mode, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may be more
noticeable in pictures shot under low light.
Flicker or banding appears in live view: Choose an option for Flicker reduction
that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply (0 290).
Bright regions or bands appear in live view: A flashing sign, flash, or other light
source with brief duration was used during live view.
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for
Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting menu (0 273).
337
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Note that the camera may
feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear during live view: “Noise” (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on
the view through the lens (0 38) during live view; in movies, the amount
and distribution of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and bright spots
is affected by frame size and rate (0 166).
Randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during live view; exit live
view when the camera is not in use.
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to A or M (0 51).
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of A or % selected in
mode M: choose new shutter speed (0 53).
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use.
Flash sync speed can be
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
compatible flash units, choose 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP)
for full range of shutter speeds (0 282).
338
Playback
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 111).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 130).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 123).
Image can not be selected as source for manual preset white balance: Image was not
created with D7200 (0 127).
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image
quality (0 77).
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 211).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation.
For consistent results over a
series of photos, choose another setting (0 133).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 107).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Camera is in mode M.
Choose another
mode.
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long
exposure noise reduction (0 271).
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF
+ JPEG (0 77).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some images are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0 266).
339
The camera displays a message stating that the folder contains no images: Use the
Playback folder option in the playback menu to choose a folder that
contains images (0 266).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 267).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 290).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken.
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 230).
Can not delete picture:
• Picture is protected: remove protection (0 245).
• Memory card is locked (0 29).
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera
(0 346).
Can not change print order:
• Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 40, 246).
• Memory card is locked (0 29).
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format.
Transfer
photos to computer and print using Capture NX-D (0 ii).
NEF (RAW)
photos can be saved in JPEG format using NEF (RAW) processing
(0 302).
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable is
connected.
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
• Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 292).
• Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in
documentation provided with the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or
transfer software.
Use card reader to copy photos to computer.
340
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Miscellaneous
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor.
Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed.
Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before
image sensor cleaning is performed.
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party
software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting,
or vignette control.
Use Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the
camera setup menu (0 251).
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
Can not connect to smart devices using NFC (0 254): Choose another
connection method (0 251).
Date of recording is not correct: The camera clock is less accurate than most
watches and household clocks.
Check the clock regularly against more
accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted.
Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an
optional power connector and AC adapter.
341
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Error Messages
Indicator
Problem Solution 0
Control
panel
View-
finder
B
(flashes)
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Set ring to minimum
aperture (highest
f-number).
29
H d Low battery.
Ready a fully-charged
spare battery.
21
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes)
• Battery exhausted. • Recharge or replace
battery.
xviii,
21, 22,
319
• Battery can not be
used.
• Contact Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
• An extremely
exhausted
rechargeable Li-ion
battery or a third-
party battery is
inserted either in the
camera or in the
optional MB-D15
battery pack.
• Replace the battery, or
recharge the battery if
the rechargeable
Li-ion battery is
exhausted.
F
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
maximum aperture.
Aperture shown in
stops from maximum
aperture.
Aperture value will be
displayed if maximum
aperture is specified.
224
342
i
(flashes)
• No lens attached. • Attach non-IX Nikkor
lens.
If a CPU lens is
attached, remove and
reattach the lens.
23, 304
• Non-CPU lens
attached.
• Select mode A or M. 51
—
FH
(flashes)
Camera unable to focus
using autofocus.
Change composition or
focus manually.
96, 97
(Exposure
indicators and
shutter speed or
aperture display
flash)
Subject too bright;
photo will be
overexposed.
• Use a lower ISO
sensitivity.
99
• In shooting mode:
P Use a third-party
ND filter
—
S Increase shutter
speed
53
A Choose a smaller
aperture (higher
f-number)
54
% Choose another
shooting mode
6
Subject too dark; photo
will be underexposed.
• Use a higher ISO
sensitivity.
99
• In shooting mode:
P Use flash 146
S Lower shutter
speed
53
A Choose a larger
aperture (lower
f-number)
54
Indicator
Problem Solution 0
Control
panel
View-
finder
343
A
(flashes)
A selected in mode
S.
Change shutter speed
or select mode M.
53, 56
%
(flashes)
% selected in mode S.
Change shutter speed
or select mode M.
53, 56
P
(flashes)
k
(flashes)
Processing in progress.
Wait until processing is
complete.
—
—
M
(flashes)
If indicator flashes for 3s
after flash fires, photo
may be underexposed.
Check photo in
monitor; if
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
229
n
(flashes)
j
(flashes)
Memory insufficient to
record further photos at
current settings, or
camera has run out of
file or folder numbers.
• Reduce quality or size. 77, 81
• Delete photographs
after copying
important images to
computer or other
device.
246
• Insert new memory
card.
22
O
(flashes)
Camera malfunction.
Release shutter.
If error
persists or appears
frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
—
Indicator
Problem Solution 0
Control
panel
View-
finder
344
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
No memory card. S
Camera cannot
detect memory
card.
Turn camera off
and confirm that
card is correctly
inserted.
22
This memory card
cannot be used.
Card may be
damaged.
Insert another card.
W,
O
(flashes)
• Error accessing
memory card.
• Use Nikon-
approved card.
379
• Check that
contacts are
clean.
If card is
damaged, contact
retailer or Nikon-
authorized
service
representative.
—
• Unable to create
new folder.
• Delete files or
insert new
memory card
after copying
important images
to computer or
other device.
22, 246
g
W,
O
(flashes)
Camera can not
control Eye-Fi
card.
• Check that Eye-Fi
card firmware is
up to date.
—
• Copy files on Eye-
Fi card to a
computer or
other device and
format card, or
insert new card.
22, 293
345
Memory card is
locked. Slide lock to
“write” position.
W,
X
(flashes)
Memory card is
locked (write
protected).
Slide card write-
protect switch to
“write” position.
29
Not available if
Eye-Fi card is locked.
W,
O
(flashes)
Eye-Fi card is
locked (write
protected).
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
[C]
(flashes)
Memory card has
not been
formatted for use
in camera.
Format memory
card or insert new
memory card.
22, 289
Clock has been
reset.
—
Camera clock is
not set.
Set camera clock. 24, 290
Unable to start live
view. Please wait.
—
The internal
temperature of
the camera is
high.
Wait for the internal
circuits to cool
before resuming
live view.
337
Folder contains no
images.
—
No images on
memory card or
in folder(s)
selected for
playback.
Select folder
containing images
from Playback
folder menu or
insert memory card
containing images.
22, 266
All images are
hidden.
—
All photos in
current folder are
hidden.
No images can be
played back until
another folder has
been selected or
Hide image used
to allow at least
one image to be
displayed.
266
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
346
Cannot display this
file.
—
File has been
created or
modified using a
computer or
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
File can not be
played back on
camera.
—
Cannot select this
file.
—
Selected image
can not be
retouched.
Images created
with other devices
can not be
retouched.
—
This movie cannot
be edited.
—
The selected
movie can not be
edited.
• Movies created
with other
devices can not
be edited.
—
• Movies must be at
least two seconds
long.
182
Could not connect;
multiple devices
detected. Try again
later.
—
Multiple smart
devices are
attempting to
connect to
camera
simultaneously.
Wait a few minutes
before trying again.
—
Error —Wi-Fi error.
Select Disable for
Wi-Fi > Network
connection, then
select Enable
again.
256
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
347
Network access not
available until
camera cools.
—
The internal
temperature of
the camera is
high.
Turn camera off
and try again after
waiting for camera
to cool.
—
Check printer. —Printer error.
Check printer.
To
resume, select
Continue (if
available).
—
*
Check paper. —
Paper in printer is
not of selected
size.
Insert paper of
correct size and
select Continue.
—
*
Paper jam. —
Paper is jammed
in printer.
Clear jam and
select Continue.
—
*
Out of paper. —
Printer is out of
paper.
Insert paper of
selected size and
select Continue.
—
*
Check ink supply. —Ink error.
Check ink.
To
resume, select
Continue.
—
*
Out of ink. —
Printer is out of
ink.
Replace ink and
select Continue.
—
*
* See printer manual for more information.
Indicator
Problem Solution 0Monitor
Control
panel
348
❚❚ Nikon D7200 Digital Camera
Specifications
Type
Type Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF
contacts)
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length in 35 mm [135]
format equivalent to approx. 1.5× that of lenses
with FX format angle of view
Effective pixels
Effective pixels 24.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor 23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels 24.72 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off
reference data (Capture NX-D software
required)
Storage
Image size (pixels) • DX (24×16) image area
6000 × 4000 (#) 4496 × 3000 ($)
2992 × 2000 (%)
• 1.3× (18×12) image area
4800 × 3200 (#) 3600 × 2400 ($)
2400 × 1600 (%)
• Photographs with image area of DX (24×16) taken with
live view selector rotated to 1 in live view
6000 × 3368 (#) 4496 × 2528 ($)
2992 × 1680 (%)
• Photographs with image area of 1.3× (18×12) taken
with live view selector rotated to 1 in live view
4800 × 2696 (#) 3600 × 2024 ($)
2400 × 1344 (%)
349
File format • NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed or
compressed
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression (Size priority);
Optimal quality compression available
• NEF (RAW) + JPEG: Single photograph recorded
in both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
Media SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC
and SDXC memory cards
Double slot Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup
storage or for separate storage of copies
created using NEF+JPEG; pictures can be
copied between cards.
File system DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex
viewfinder
Frame coverage • DX (24×16) image area: Approx. 100% horizontal
and 100% vertical
• 1.3× (18×12) image area: Approx. 97% horizontal
and 97% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.94 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,
–1.0 m
–1
)
Eyepoint 19.5 mm (–1.0 m
–1
; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment –2–+1 m
–1
Storage
350
Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with
AF area brackets (framing grid can be
displayed)
Reflex mirror Quick return
Depth-of-field preview Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to
value selected by user (A and M modes) or by
camera (other modes)
Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including
type G, E, and D lenses (some restrictions apply
to PC lenses) and DX lenses, AI-P NIKKOR lenses,
and non-CPU AI lenses (A and M modes only).
IX
NIKKOR lenses, lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI
lenses can not be used.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or
faster (the electronic rangefinder supports the
center 1 focus point with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/8 or faster).
Viewfinder
351
Shutter
Type Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-
plane shutter
Speed
1
/
8000–30 s in steps of
1
/
3 or
1
/
2 EV, bulb, time,
X250
Flash sync speed X=
1
/
250 s; synchronizes with shutter at
1
/
320 s or
slower (flash range drops at speeds between
1
/
250 and
1
/
320 s)
Release
Release mode S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
C
H (continuous high speed), Q (quiet shutter-
release), E (self-timer), M
UP (mirror up)
Approximate frame
advance rate
• JPEG and 12-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with
DX (24×16) selected for Image area
C
L: 1–6 fps CH: 6 fps
• JPEG and 12-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with
1.3× (18×12) selected for Image area
C
L: 1–6 fps CH: 7 fps
• 14-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with DX (24×16)
selected for Image area
C
L: 1–5 fps CH: 5 fps
• 14-bit NEF (RAW) images recorded with 1.3× (18×12)
selected for Image area
C
L: 1–6 fps CH: 6 fps
Note: Maximum frame rate in live view is 3.7 fps.
Self-timer 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of
0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
Remote control modes
(ML-L3)
Delayed remote, quick-response remote,
remote mirror-up
352
Exposure
Metering TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor
Metering method • Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G, E,
and D lenses); color matrix metering II (other
CPU lenses); color matrix metering available
with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of approximately 75%
given to 8 mm circle in center of frame.
Diameter of circle can be changed to 6, 10, or
13 mm, or weighting can be based on average
of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 8-mm
circle)
• Spot: Meters circle with diameter of about
3.5 mm (about 2.5% of frame) centered on
selected focus point (on center focus point
when non-CPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens,
20 °C/68 °F)
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
Mode Auto modes (i auto; j auto (flash off)); scene
modes (k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports;
n close up; o night portrait; r night landscape; s party/
indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/dawn; w pet
portrait; x candlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food);
special effects modes (% night vision; g color sketch;
i miniature effect; u selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high
key; 3 low key); programmed auto with flexible
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-
priority auto (A); manual (M); U1 (user settings 1); U2
(user settings 2)
353
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of
1
/
3 or
1
/
2 EV in P, S, A, M, SCENE, and % modes
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with
A AE-L/AF-L button
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
ISO 100–25600 in steps of
1
/
3 or
1
/
2 EV.
In P, S, A,
and M modes, can also be set to approx. 1 or
2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent; monochrome
only) above ISO 25600; auto ISO sensitivity
control available
Active D-Lighting Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, Off
Focus
Autofocus Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500 II autofocus
sensor module with TTL phase detection, fine-
tuning, 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type
sensors; f/8 supported by 1 sensor), and AF-
assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft
8in.–9ft 10in.)
Detection range –3 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Lens servo • Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C
selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking
activated automatically according to subject
status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode Single-point AF; 9-, 21-, or 51-point dynamic-
area AF, 3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
A AE-L/AF-L button
Exposure
354
Flash
Built-in flash
i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g: Auto flash with auto
pop-up
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Flash control TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor is available with built-in flash; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with
matrix or center-weighted metering, standard
i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Flash mode Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow
sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fill-
flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync
with red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow
sync, rear-curtain sync, off; Auto FP High-Speed
Sync supported
Flash compensation –3 – +1 EV in increments of
1
/
3 or
1
/
2 EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit
is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full
output
Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Nikon CLS supported; commander mode
option available
Sync terminal AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available
separately)
355
White balance
White balance Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent
(7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade,
preset manual (up to 6 values can be stored,
spot white balance measurement available
during live view), choose color temperature
(2500 K–10,000 K), all with fine-tuning
Bracketing
Bracketing types Exposure, flash, white balance, and ADL
Live view
Modes C (photo live view), 1 (movie live view)
Lens servo • Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time
servo AF (AF-F)
• Manual focus (M)
AF-area mode Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,
subject-tracking AF
Autofocus Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera
selects focus point automatically when face-
priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
Movie
Metering TTL exposure metering using main image
sensor
Metering method Matrix or center-weighted
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
• 1920 × 1080; 60p (progressive), 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
• 1280 × 720; 60p, 50p
Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and
24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
respectively; options support both ★high and
normal image quality
1920 × 1080; 60p and 50p are available only
when 1.3× (18×12) is selected for Image area
in the movie shooting menu
356
File format MOV
Video compression H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
Other options Index marking, time-lapse photography
Monitor
Monitor 8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 1229 k-dot (VGA; 640 ×
RGBW × 480 = 1,228,800 dots), TFT monitor
with approx. 170° viewing angle, approx. 100%
frame coverage, and brightness adjustment
Playback
Playback Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or
calendar) playback with playback zoom, movie
playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, and auto
image rotation
Interface
USB Hi-Speed USB; connection to built-in USB port is
recommended
HDMI output Type C HDMI connector
Accessory terminal • Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10
(available separately)
• Remote cord: MC-DC2 (available separately)
• GPS unit: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)
Audio input Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in
power supported)
Audio output Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter)
Movie
357
Wireless
Standards IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g
Operating frequency 2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11)
Range (line of sight) Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles)
Data rate 54 Mbps
Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE
standard.
Actual rates may differ.
Authentication Open system, WPA2-PSK
Wireless setup Supports WPS
Access protocols Infrastructure
NFC
Operation NFC Forum Type 3 Tag
Supported languages
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi,
Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,
Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil,
Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
358
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in
this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Power source
Battery One EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Battery pack Optional MB-D15 multi-power battery pack
with one Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion
battery or six AA alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium
batteries
AC adapter EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power
connector (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
1
/
4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 135.5 × 106.5 × 76 mm (5.4 × 4.2 ×
3.0 in.)
Weight Approx. 765 g (1 lb 11.0 oz) with battery and
memory card but without body cap; approx.
675 g (1 lb 7.9 oz; camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
359
❚❚ MH-25a Battery Charger
❚❚ EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Rated input
(in North America)
AC 120 V, 60 Hz, 0.2 A
Rated input
(in other regions)
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A
Rated output DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Supported batteries Nikon EN-EL15 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.),
excluding projections
Length of power cable
(if supplied)
Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Weight Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied
power connector (power cable or AC wall
adapter)
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.0 V/1900 mAh
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
Weight Approx. 88 g (3.1 oz), excluding terminal cover
360
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lens
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–105 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 15 elements in 11 groups (including 1 ED lens
element, 1 aspherical lens element)
Angle of view 76°–15° 20´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 105)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (0 98) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range • 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 105 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 76 mm diameter × 89 mm (distance
from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 420 g (14.8 oz)
361
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lens
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–140 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens
element, 1 aspherical lens element)
Angle of view 76°–11° 30´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (0 98) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range • 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)
362
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II Lens
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in
this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–200 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 16 elements in 12 groups (including 2 ED lens
elements, 3 aspherical lens elements)
Angle of view 76°–8°
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 135,
200)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Focus distance indicator 0.5 m to innity (∞)
Minimum focus distance 0.5 m (1.64 ft) from focal plane (0 98) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range • 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 200 mm focal length: f/5.6–36
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 72 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 77 mm maximum diameter × 96.5 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 565 g (19.9 oz)
363
This section describes the features available with AF-S DX
NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–
140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–
5.6G ED VR II lenses.
The lens generally used in this manual for
illustrative purposes is the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–
5.6G ED VR.
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
Lenses
Focal length scale
Focal length mark
Vibration reduction ON/OFF
switch (0 367)
Lens mounting mark
(0 23)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Zoom ring (0 33)
CPU contacts
(0 307)
Focus ring (0 97)
A-M mode switch (0 97)
365
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
A Zoom Lock Switch
To lock the zoom ring, rotate it to the 18 mm position and slide the
zoom lock switch to LOCK.
This prevents the lens extending under its
own weight while the camera is being carried from place to place.
D Focus Distance Indicator
Note that the focus distance indicator is intended only as a guide and
may not accurately show the distance to the subject and may, due to
depth of eld or other factors, not show ∞ when the camera is focused
on a distant object.
LOCK
18
Focal length mark Focus distance mark
Vibration reduction
ON/OFF switch (0 367)
Lens mounting mark
(0 23)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Zoom ring (0 33)
CPU contacts (0 307)
Focus ring (0 97)
Focus mode switch (0 97)
Vibration reduction mode
switch (0 368)
Zoom lock switch
Focal length
scale
Focus distance indicator
366
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, AF-S DX
NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–
200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II are for use exclusively with Nikon DX
format digital cameras.
D Lens Care
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces.
To
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol
or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean
the lens.
• The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens
element.
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible
pouch.
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or
camera using only the hood.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,
dry location to prevent mold and rust.
Do not store in direct sunlight
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry.
Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp
parts made from reinforced plastic.
367
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
The lenses described in this section support vibration reduction
(VR), which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the
camera is panned, allowing shutter speeds for DX format
cameras to be slowed by approximately 3.5 stops (AF-S DX
NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR and AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–
200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II) or 4.0 stops (AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–
140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR) at maximum zoom position
(according to Camera and Imaging Products Association [CIPA]
standards; effects vary with the photographer and shooting
conditions).
This increases the range of shutter speeds available
and permits hand-held, tripod-free photography in a wide range
of situations.
To use vibration reduction, slide the
vibration reduction switch to ON.
Vibration reduction is activated when the
shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, reducing the effects of camera
shake on the image in the viewfinder and
simplifying the process of framing the
subject and focusing in both autofocus
and manual focus modes.
When the
camera is panned, vibration reduction
applies only to motion that is not part of
the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied
only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera
smoothly in a wide arc.
Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely
mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the tripod head is not
secured or when using a monopod.
368
D Vibration Reduction
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect.
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging.
When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released.
This does not indicate a
malfunction; wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
shooting.
A The Vibration Reduction Mode Switch (AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
VR II Lenses)
The vibration reduction mode switch is used to select the vibration
reduction mode when vibration reduction is on.
• Select NORMAL to reduce the effects of vibration when photographing
from a fixed position and in other situations with comparatively little
camera motion.
• Select ACTIVE to reduce the effects of vibration when shooting from a
moving vehicle, while walking, and in other situations with active
camera motion.
Slide the vibration reduction mode switch to NORMAL for panning shots.
When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally,
for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake),
making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc.
369
A Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at
least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
Shadow Vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR:
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance without
vignetting
D5300/D5000/D3100/
D3000
18 mm 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
D5200/D5100/D3200
18 mm 3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
D5500/D3300
18 mm 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–105 mm No vignetting
D7200/D7100/D7000/
D300 series/D200/D100/
D80
All No vignetting
D90/D70 series
18 mm 1.5 m/4 ft 11 in.
24–105 mm No vignetting
D50
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24–105 mm No vignetting
D60/D40 series
18 mm 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–105 mm No vignetting
370
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR:
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance without
vignetting
D7200/D7100/D7000/
D300 series/D200/D100
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24–140 mm No vignetting
D90/D80/D50
18 mm 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–140 mm No vignetting
D5500/D5300/D5200/
D5100/D5000/D3300/
D3200/D3100/D3000/
D70 series/D60/D40 series
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–140 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II:
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance without
vignetting
D7200/D7100/D7000/
D300 series/D200/D100
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24–200 mm No vignetting
D90/D80
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
50–200 mm No vignetting
D5500/D5300/D5200/
D5100/D5000/D3300/
D3200/D3100/D3000/
D70 series/D60/D50/
D40 series
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–200 mm No vignetting
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the
angle of view of a lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting will
occur at a focal length of 18 mm.
371
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• 67 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67
• Rear Lens Cap
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
• Bayonet Hood HB-32
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until
the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its
base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the
hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• 67 mm screw-on filters
• LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps
372
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• 67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67
• Rear Lens Cap
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
• 67 mm screw-on filters
• LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
• Bayonet Hood HB-32
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until
the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its
base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the
hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
373
A Supplied Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
• 72 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-72
• Rear Lens Cap
• Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
• Bayonet Hood HB-35
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until
the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its
base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the
hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
A Optional Accessories for AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
• 72 mm screw-on filters
• LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps
NORMAL ACTIVE
374
A A Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses
Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those
shown below.
1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject:
If the focus point contains both
foreground and background
objects, the camera may focus on
the background and the subject
may be out of focus.
Example: A far-off portrait
subject at some distance from
the background
2 The subject contains many fine details.
The camera may have difficulty
focusing on subjects that lack
contrast or appear smaller than
objects in the background.
Example: A field of flowers
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another
subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph.
For
more information, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (0 96).
375
A Using M/A (Autofocus with Manual Override) with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II Lenses
To focus using autofocus with manual override (M/A):
1 Slide the lens focus-mode switch (0 365) to M/A.
2Focus.
If desired, you can over-ride autofocus by rotating the lens focus ring
while keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway (or while
pressing the button to which AF-ON has been assigned in the Custom
Settings menu). To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-release
button halfway (or press the button again).
A Focusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR and AF-S DX NIKKOR
18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses
When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and
the lens A-M switch is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the
shutter-release button pressed halfway after the autofocus operation
is complete and manually rotating the focus ring.
Do not rotate the
focus ring until the autofocus operation is complete.
To refocus using
autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again.
376
❚❚ Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is
a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide
standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders
stored on the memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in
which information stored with photographs is used for optimal
color reproduction when the images are output on Exif-
compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the
digital camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to
be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to
a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV
devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control
signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable
connection.
377
Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PictBridge is a
trademark.
The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C,
LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC
Forum, Inc., in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trade
names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided
with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
A Conformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using
the Conformity marking option in the setup menu (0 293).
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(http://www.freetype.org).
All rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2015 The HarfBuzz Project
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz).
All rights
reserved.
378
A Certificates
379
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in the camera.
Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds
are recommended for movie recording.
Recording may end
unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.
1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB
cards.
2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-
compliant.
The camera supports UHS-1.
3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card
will be used are SDXC-compliant.
The camera supports UHS-1.
Other cards have not been tested.
For more details on the above
cards, please contact the manufacturer.
Approved Memory Cards
SD cards SDHC cards
2
SDXC cards
3
SanDisk
2GB
1
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB, 512 GB
Toshiba 64 GB
Panasonic —
4GB, 6GB, 8GB, 12GB,
16 GB, 24 GB, 32 GB
48 GB, 64 GB
Lexar Media 2GB
1
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB —
Multi-use
—
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
64 GB
Platinum II
Professional 64 GB, 128 GB, 256 GB
Full-HD Video 4GB, 8GB, 16GB —
380
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro 95 MB/s UHS-I
SDHC card at different image quality (0 77), image size (0 81),
and image area settings (0 73).
❚❚ DX (24×16) Image Area
Memory Card Capacity
Image quality Image size
File size
1
No. of
images
1
Buffer
capacity
2
NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed,
12-bit
— 22.2 MB 379 27
NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed,
14-bit
— 28.0 MB 294 18
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit — 20.6 MB 511 35
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit — 25.4 MB 428 26
JPEG fine
3
Large 12.7 MB 929 100
Medium 7.7 MB 1500 100
Small 3.9 MB 2900 100
JPEG normal
3
Large 6.5 MB 1800 100
Medium 3.9 MB 3000 100
Small 2.1 MB 5600 100
JPEG basic
3
Large 2.7 MB 3500 100
Medium 1.9 MB 5700 100
Small 1.1 MB 10,300 100
381
❚❚ 1.3× (18×12) Image Area
1 All figures are approximate.
File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Drops if
Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression (0 80), ISO sensitivity is set
to 12800 or higher, or long exposure noise reduction or auto distortion control is on.
3Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority.
Selecting Optimal
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer capacity drop
accordingly.
Image quality Image size
File size
1
No. of
images
1
Buffer
capacity
2
NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed,
12-bit
— 15.0 MB 575 44
NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed,
14-bit
— 18.7 MB 449 29
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit — 13.8 MB 770 67
NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit — 16.9 MB 648 46
JPEG fine
3
Large 8.6 MB 1300 100
Medium 5.3 MB 2200 100
Small 2.9 MB 4000 100
JPEG normal
3
Large 4.3 MB 2600 100
Medium 2.8 MB 4300 100
Small 1.5 MB 7400 100
JPEG basic
3
Large 2.0 MB 5100 100
Medium 1.4 MB 7900 100
Small 0.9 MB 13,100 100
A d3—Max. Continuous Release (0 280)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100.
382
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, interval between shots, and the length of time
menus are displayed.
In the case of AA batteries, capacity also
varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries can not
be used.
Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D15
multi-power battery pack are given below.
• Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard
1
)
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 1110 shots
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 1110 shots
Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 630 shots
• Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard
2
)
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 4090 shots
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 4090 shots
Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 1510 shots
• Movies
3
One EN-EL15 battery (camera): Approximately 80 minutes of HD
footage
One EN-EL15 battery (MB-D15): Approximately 80 minutes of HD
footage
Six AA alkaline batteries (MB-D15): Approximately 30 minutes of HD
footage
Battery Life
383
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and
one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; flash fired once every other shot.
Live
view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under the
following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium),
shutter speed
1
/
250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled
from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor
turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once standby timer expires.
3 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S DX
NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR lens under conditions specified by the Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
Individual movies can be up to 29 minutes and
59 seconds (1080/30p) in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits are
reached if the camera temperature rises.
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) features
• Using the camera with optional accessories
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from Nikon EN-EL15
rechargeable Li-ion batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean.
Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging.
Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
384
Symbols
i (Auto mode) ....................................30
j (Auto (flash off) mode).................30
SCENE (Scene mode) ............................41
EFFECTS (Special effects) .....................44
k (Portrait) ............................................42
l (Landscape)......................................42
p (Child).................................................42
m (Sports)...............................................42
n (Close up)..........................................42
o (Night portrait)................................42
r (Night landscape)...........................42
s (Party/indoor)..................................42
t (Beach/snow)...................................42
u (Sunset)..............................................43
v (Dusk/dawn) ....................................43
w (Pet portrait) ....................................43
x (Candlelight)......................................43
y (Blossom)...........................................43
z (Autumn colors)..............................43
0 (Food)..................................................43
% (Night vision) ...................................44
g (Color sketch)..........................44, 46
i (Miniature effect)...................45, 47
u (Selective color).......................45, 49
1 (Silhouette).......................................45
2 (High key)..........................................45
3 (Low key)...........................................45
P (Programmed auto) ........................52
S (Shutter-priority auto)....................53
A (Aperture-priority auto).................54
M (Manual) .............................................56
U1/U2.........................................................62
S (Single frame) ....................................66
C
L (Continuous low speed)...............66
CH (Continuous high speed).............66
Q (Quiet shutter-release)...................66
E (Self-timer) ................................ 66
, 69
MUP (Mirror up) .............................. 66, 71
! (Face-priority AF)........................... 88
$ (Wide-area AF) ................................ 88
% (Normal-area AF)............................ 88
& (Subject-tracking AF)................. 89
a (Matrix) ...........................................105
Z (Center-weighted)......................105
b (Spot)...............................................105
AUTO (Auto flash)................................145
Y (Red-eye reduction)......... 145, 147
SLOW (Slow sync)...................... 145, 147
REAR (Rear-curtain sync)..................147
E (Exposure compensation).........109
Y (Flash compensation)...............151
O (Flexible program).......................... 52
a (Live view) button.........12, 31, 161
i button..................................... 189, 233
R (Info) button ..........................13, 185
J button......................................17, 284
D switch ...................................................5
L (Preset manual)............... 111, 120
D (Bracketing)................................197
I (Focus indicator).............. 34, 93, 98
t (Memory buffer).............................. 68
M (Flash-ready indicator).................. 36
Numerics
1.3× (18×12) ...................... 73, 168, 169
12-bit....................................................... 80
14-bit....................................................... 80
3D-tracking .................................... 87
, 90
A
AC adapter ..........................................319
Accessories..........................................319
Active D-Lighting...........139, 207, 270
ADL bracketing..................................207
Index
385
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set) . 197
AE lock.................................................. 107
AE only (Auto bracketing set)...... 197
AE-L/AF-L button........ 94, 107, 285, 288
AF...................................................... 83–95
AF activation ...................................... 277
AF area brackets ................. 10, 25, 235
AF fine-tune........................................ 292
AF-A..........................................................83
AF-area mode .......................................86
AF-assist......................................277, 317
AF-C................................................ 83, 276
AF-F ..........................................................84
AF-mode button...........................84, 90
AF-S ......................................... 83, 84, 276
After delete......................................... 267
Angle of view..................................... 310
Aperture ......................................... 54–56
Aperture-priority auto.......................54
Aspect ratio ........................................ 298
Auto (White balance).............111, 112
Auto bracketing.......................197, 284
Auto distortion control .................. 271
Auto flash............................................ 145
Auto image rotation........................ 290
Auto ISO sensitivity control.......... 102
Auto-area AF..................................87, 90
Autoexposure lock........................... 107
Autofocus....................................... 83–95
Autofocus mode..................................83
Auto-servo AF.......................................83
B
Backlight................................................... 5
Backup (Role played by card in Slot
2)..............................................................82
Battery....................21, 22, 26, 291, 359
Battery life........................................... 382
Battery pack ....................................... 319
Beep ...................................................... 280
Body cap..........................................3, 319
Bracketing ................................. 197
, 284
Built-in flash.................................36, 144
Bulb................................................... 58, 59
C
Calendar playback............................232
Camera Control Pro 2......................319
Capture NX-D ..........................................ii
Center-weighted..................... 105, 278
Charging the battery......................... 21
Choose color temp. (White balance)
111, 117
Choose start/end point ..................179
Clean image sensor..........................321
Clock battery ......................................188
Cloudy (White balance) ..................111
CLS..........................................................311
Color outline.......................................295
Color sketch..........................44, 46, 295
Color space..........................................270
Color temperature.........111, 113, 117
Command dial ...................................285
Communication unit .......................319
Compatible lenses............................304
Compressed (Type)............................ 80
Conformity marking .............. 293, 377
Connector for external microphone.
2
Continuous high speed.................... 66
Continuous low speed.............66, 280
Continuous release mode ............... 66
Continuous-servo AF......................... 83
Control panel...........................................9
Copy image(s) ....................................267
Copyright................................... 240
, 291
CPU contacts ......................................307
CPU lens ........................................29, 304
Creative Lighting System...............311
Custom Settings................................276
386
D
Date and time............................. 24, 290
DCF........................................................ 376
Default settings ................................ 194
Delayed remote (Remote control
mode (ML-L3))................................. 156
Delete............................................ 40, 246
Delete all images.............................. 248
Delete current image............... 40, 246
Delete selected images.................. 248
Depth-of-field.......................................55
Destination................................192, 273
Digital Print Order Format............ 376
Diopter adjustment control . 25, 319,
333
Direct sunlight (White balance).. 111
Distortion control............................. 295
D-Lighting........................................... 294
DPOF............................................267, 376
DX (24×16)..........................73, 168, 169
Dynamic-area AF..........................86, 90
E
Edit movie.........................179, 233, 296
Electronic rangefinder.......................98
EV steps for exposure cntrl........... 278
Exif......................................................... 376
Exposure.....................................105–110
Exposure bracketing....................... 197
Exposure compensation......109, 278,
283
Exposure delay mode..................... 280
Exposure indicator.................... 57
, 286
Exposure lock .................................... 107
Exposure meters..................................37
External microphone...................... 193
Eye-Fi upload..................................... 293
F
Face-priority AF ...................................88
File naming ............................... 268
, 273
File number sequence ....................280
Filter effects .............................. 134, 294
Fine-tune optimal exposure.........278
Fine-tuning white balance............114
Firmware version ..............................293
Fisheye..................................................295
Flash ......... 36, 144, 145, 151, 153, 311
Flash (White balance)......................111
Flash bracketing................................197
Flash cntrl for built-in flash ...........283
Flash compensation ........................151
Flash mode................................ 145, 147
Flash only (Auto bracketing set) .197
Flash range..........................................150
Flash ready indicator..... 36, 154, 280,
316
Flash shutter speed................ 148, 283
Flash sync speed ..................... 282, 351
Flat (Set Picture Control)................130
Flexible program................................. 52
Flicker reduction...............................290
Fluorescent (White balance).........111
Fn button............................. 76, 284, 288
f-number................................52, 54, 307
Focal length.............................. 225, 309
Focal length scale..........363, 364, 365
Focal plane mark................................. 98
Focus indicator...................... 34, 93, 98
Focus lock.............................................. 93
Focus mode .......................................... 83
Focus point ...... 33, 34, 86, 89, 98, 277
Focus tracking.............................85, 276
Focusing screen ................................350
Focus-mode selector......................... 83
Format memory card ......................289
Frame size/frame rate ..166
, 192, 273
Framing guides ............................ 13, 14
Frequency response .............. 192, 274
Front-curtain sync ............................147
Full-frame playback .........................229
387
Full-time servo AF ...............................84
FV lock.................................................. 153
G
GPS ...............................................227, 241
H
H.264..................................................... 356
HDMI.................................. 170, 292, 376
HDMI connector .................................... 2
Headphone volume ........................ 193
Headphones....................................... 193
Help..........................................................17
Hi ISO command dial access ........ 101
Hide image ......................................... 266
High definition .................................. 376
High Dynamic Range (HDR) 141, 270
High ISO NR...............................271, 275
Highlight display .............................. 193
Highlights............................................ 236
Histogram ..................................237, 238
I
Image area. 73, 75, 81, 168, 169, 269,
274
Image comment ............................... 291
Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 290
Image overlay...........................294, 299
Image quality.............................. 77, 268
Image review .................. 176, 230, 267
Image size ...........................81, 169, 269
Incandescent (White balance)..... 111
Index marking ..........................167, 178
In-focus indicator ..................34
, 93, 98
Information ...............................185, 234
Information display .........13, 185, 281
Interval timer shooting .........217, 272
ISO sensitivity ....................99, 102, 281
ISO sensitivity settings ..........102, 271
ISO sensitivity step value............... 278
i-TTL....................................................... 149
J
JPEG .................................................. 77, 80
JPEG basic..............................................77
JPEG compression .....................80, 269
JPEG fine ................................................77
JPEG normal.......................................... 77
L
L (large) ..........................................81, 169
LAN adapters......................................319
Landscape (Set Picture Control)..130
Language................................... 290, 357
LCD illumination .......................... 5, 281
Lens.......................23, 29, 224, 304, 363
Lens focus ring.........97, 363, 364, 365
Lens mount.......................................3, 98
Lens vibration reduction switch..367
Live view .............................31, 161–170
Live view selector ......................31, 161
Location data ........................... 227, 241
Lock mirror up for cleaning...........324
Long exposure NR ............................271
Lossless compressed (Type)............ 80
M
M (medium) ..................................81, 169
Manage Picture Control ...... 135, 270,
275
Manual.............................................56, 97
Manual focus........................................ 97
Matrix metering.................................105
Max. continuous release ................280
Maximum aperture .......150
, 307, 317
Maximum sensitivity........................103
MB-D15..............................281, 286, 319
Memory buffer..................................... 68
Memory card ....... 22, 27, 82, 379, 380
Memory card capacity.....................380
Metering...............................................105
Microphone ........................................193
388
Microphone sensitivity .........192, 273
Miniature effect ...................45, 47, 296
Minimum aperture ......................29, 51
Minimum shutter speed................ 103
Mired .................................................... 116
Mirror....................................71, 156, 324
Mirror up .........................................66, 71
Mode dial ................................................. 6
Mode dial lock release......................... 6
Modeling flash ........................... 55, 284
Monitor...................................12, 39, 229
Monitor brightness........191, 192, 289
Monitor color balance.................... 290
Monitor off delay.............................. 279
Monitor pre-flash ....................149, 154
Monochrome............................130, 294
Mounting mark...............363, 364, 365
Movie ISO sensitivity settings...... 275
Movie live view ................................. 161
Movie quality...................166, 192, 273
Movie shooting menu.................... 273
Movie-record button .............163, 286
Movies.................................................. 161
Multiple exposure...................211, 272
MY MENU............................................ 297
N
NEF (RAW)..............................77, 80, 302
NEF (RAW) bit depth ..........................80
NEF (RAW) processing...........295, 302
NEF (RAW) recording ............... 80, 269
Network............................................... 293
Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 130
NFC...............................................254
, 264
Non-CPU lens...................224, 305, 308
Non-CPU lens data........................... 224
Normal-area AF....................................88
Number of focus points................. 277
Number of shots............................... 382
O
OK button.....................................17, 284
Optimal quality (JPEG compression)
.
80
Optional flash........................... 283, 311
Overflow (Role played by card in
Slot 2) .................................................... 82
Overview data....................................242
P
Perspective control..........................296
Photo information............................234
Photo shooting menu.....................268
PictBridge ............................................376
Picture Controls....................... 130, 132
Picture size ..........................................310
Playback........................................39, 229
Playback display options ..... 234, 266
Playback folder..................................266
Playback information ......................234
Playback menu ..................................266
Playback slot and folder.................233
Playback zoom...................................243
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........130
Power connector ..............................319
Predictive focus tracking ................. 85
Preset manual (White balance)...111,
120
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down .................................... 35
Press the shutter-release button
halfway ................................................. 34
Preview button........ 55
, 167, 285, 288
Programmed auto.............................. 52
Protecting photographs ................245
Pv button....................55, 167, 285, 288
Q
Quick retouch ....................................295
389
Quick-response remote (Remote
control mode (ML-L3)).................. 156
Quiet shutter-release.........................66
R
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role played
by card in Slot 2) ................................82
Rear-curtain sync.............................. 147
RECENT SETTINGS ............................ 297
Red-eye correction .......................... 294
Red-eye reduction ..................145, 147
Release button to use dial............. 285
Release mode .................................. 8, 66
Release mode dial.......................... 8, 66
Release mode dial lock release . 8, 66
Remote control ........................156, 319
Remote control mode (ML-L3) ... 156,
272
Remote cord..........................................58
Remote mirror-up (Remote control
mode (ML-L3)) ................................. 156
Remote on duration (ML-L3)........ 279
Removing the lens from the camera
29
Reset ..................................................... 194
Reset custom settings .................... 276
Reset movie shooting menu........ 273
Reset photo shooting menu ........ 268
Reset user settings..............................65
Resize.................................................... 295
Restoring default settings............. 194
Retouch menu..........................233, 294
Reverse indicators............................ 286
RGB........................................................ 237
Role played by card in Slot 2. 82
, 268
Rotate tall............................................ 267
S
S (small) ......................................... 81, 169
Save selected frame ...............179, 183
Save user settings ...............................62
Save/load settings............................291
Scene mode.......................................... 41
SD memory card. 22
, 27, 82, 379, 380
Select date................................. 249, 266
Select to send to smart device/
deselect .................................... 233, 263
Selective color......................45, 49, 296
Self-timer ...............................66, 69, 279
Sensitivity .....................................99, 102
Set clock from satellite....................227
Set Picture Control ........130, 270, 275
Setup menu ........................................289
Shade (White balance)....................111
Shooting data ....................................239
Shutter speed................................53, 56
Shutter-priority auto..........................53
Shutter-release button ....35, 93, 107,
279, 288
Shutter-release button AE-L .........279
Side-by-side comparison ...............296
Single frame.......................................... 66
Single-point AF............................. 86, 90
Single-servo AF.............................83, 84
Size..................................................81, 169
Size priority (JPEG compression)... 80
Slide show ...........................................267
Slot ...........................................27, 82, 233
Slot empty release lock...................286
Slow sync ................................... 145, 147
Smart device.......................................250
Speaker......................................................4
Special effects ...................................... 44
Speedlight...........................................311
Spot........................................................105
Spot white balance ..........................124
SSID........................................................251
Standard (Set Picture Control) .....130
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
SLR.............................................. 149
, 313
Standby timer ................... 37, 227, 279
Storage folder ....................................268
390
Store points by orientation .......... 277
Straighten ........................................... 295
Subject-tracking AF............................89
T
Thumbnail playback ....................... 231
Time ..................................24, 58, 60, 290
Time zone and date.................. 24, 290
Time-lapse photography......171, 275
Timer.............................................. 69, 217
Toning.........................................133, 135
Trim..............................................294, 298
Trimming movies............................. 179
Tripod........................................................ 3
Two-button reset ............................. 194
Type D lens................................304, 307
Type E lens.................................304, 307
Type G lens................................304, 307
U
User settings .........................................62
UT-1....................................................... 319
UTC...............................................228, 241
V
Vibration reduction......................... 367
View SSID ............................................ 251
Viewfinder ...................10, 25, 319, 349
Viewfinder eyepiece ..........................70
Viewfinder eyepiece cap..................70
Viewfinder focus........................ 25, 319
Viewfinder grid display.................. 280
ViewNX-i....................................................ii
Vignette control ............................... 271
Virtual horizon......................13
, 14, 291
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 130
Volume................................................. 178
W
WB (White balance)................111, 202
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
202
White balance........111
, 202, 269, 274
Wide-area AF........................................ 88
Wi-Fi.......................................................250
Wind noise reduction............ 192, 274
Wireless Mobile Utility .......... 250, 251
Wireless network .................... 250, 319
Wireless remote controller. 160, 287,
319
Wireless transmitter.........................319
WT-5 ......................................................319
En_02
SB5B02(11)
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
Printed in Thailand
6MB27011-02
En
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
En
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or
tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime, anywhere.
Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of charge from the App Store
and Google Play.
pQ1230UM_NT(En)01_cover.fm Page 1 Monday, February 16, 2015 12:05 PM
